Yamaha PSR-A1000 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: PSR-A1000

Categoría: Sintetizador

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

OWNER’S MANUAL

Before using the PSR-A1000, be sure to read “Precautions„ on pages 3-4.

PSR-A1000

(bottom)

The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of

the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your pur-

chase to aid identiﬁcation in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

PSR-A1000

(3)-7

1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even

death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

•

Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

•

Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent recom-

mended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

•

Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

•

Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as

heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise

damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a posi-

tion where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

•

Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter-

nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no

user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

•

Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in

damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liq-

uids which might spill into any openings.

•

Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

•

Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

•

If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if

there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if

any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,

immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor

plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by quali-

ﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or

others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

•

When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord.

•

Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or

during electrical storms.

•

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a mul-

tiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

•

Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or

extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or

in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁgu-

ration or damage to the internal components.

•

Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo

equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,

the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

•

Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it

might accidentally fall over.

•

Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and

other cables.

•

Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching

the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could

cause damage to the internal components or result in the instru-

ment falling over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor Location

Introduction

PSR-A1000

(3)-7

2/2

•

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo-

nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the

power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to mini-

mum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

•

When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated

wiping cloths.

•

Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

•

Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the

gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC out-

let. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha ser-

vice personnel.

•

Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,

since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

•

Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instru-

ment, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or

connectors.

•

Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high

or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent

hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the

ears, consult a physician.

Saving and backing up your data

•

Current memory data (see page 36) is lost when you turn off the

power to the instrument. Save the data to a ﬂoppy disk/the User

Drive (see page 36).

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect opera-

tion. Save important data to a ﬂoppy disk.

Backing up the ﬂoppy disk

•

To protect against data loss through media damage, we recom-

mend that you save your important data onto two ﬂoppy disks.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

When you change settings in a display page and then exit

from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter

Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically

stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the

power without properly exiting from the relevant display.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

PSR-A1000

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-A1000!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully

so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced

and convenient functions of the PSR-A1000.

We also recommend that you keep this manual

in a safe and handy place for future reference.

PSR-A1000

Accessories

■

PA-300 AC Adaptor

■

Floppy Disk [includes style ﬁles, song ﬁles and MIDI Driver (page 138)]

■

Music Stand (page 17)

■

Data List

■

Owner’s Manual

* May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference.

Also, a separate Data List is provided.

Introduction (page 3):

Please read this section ﬁrst.

Quick Guide (page 20):

This section explains how to use the basic functions.

Basic Operation (page 35):

This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls.

Reference (page 49):

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR-A1000’s various

functions.

Data List :

Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

Trademarks:

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

* The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument. For example, the voice or style name appearing in the LCD screens in

this manual may differ from that of the actual instrument.

* The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English.

* The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

* Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has

license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE

data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant

laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

PSR-A1000

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disk

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.

• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

To insert a ﬂoppy disk into the disk drive:

• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward,

towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the

slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into

place and the eject button pops out.

To eject a ﬂoppy disk:

Before ejecting the disk, be sure to conﬁrm that data

is not being written to the ﬂoppy disk.

If data is currently being written to the ﬂoppy disk in

the following operations, the messages “Now

executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting”

appears in the display.

• Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data

(page 39 - 41).

• Naming ﬁles and folders (page 38); creating a new

folder (page 41).

• Copying a disk to an another disk (page 134);

formatting the disk (page 134).

• Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

when the data is being written to the ﬂoppy disk.

Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk

drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;

the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is

fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.

• If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not

pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject

properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-

pressed position with the disk extending from the

drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do

not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since

using force in this situation can damage the disk drive

mechanism or the ﬂoppy disk. To remove a partially

ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again,

or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the

eject procedure.

• Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data read and write errors.

• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will

eventually cause read and write errors.

• To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-

available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the

head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer

about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.

• Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk

drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk

drive or ﬂoppy disks.

Compatible Disk Type

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks

Drive lamp

When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at

the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the

drive can be used.

Eject button

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

PSR-A1000

To handle ﬂoppy disks with care:

• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy

disks in their protective cases when they are not in

use.

• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely

high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust

or liquids.

• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

• Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as

those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,

since magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase

data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

• Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or

housing.

• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels

to a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are

attached in the proper location.

To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):

• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide

the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position

(tab open).

Data backup

• For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that

you keep two copies of important data on separate

ﬂoppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost

or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to

Disk function on page 134.

About the Display Messages

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button.

About the Floppy Disks

write-protect tab open

(protect position)

For this example, press the

[G] (YES) button to

execute formatting.

You can select the desired

language from the Help dis-

play (page 46).

PSR-A1000

Table of Contents

Introduction ............................ 3

PRECAUTIONS.......................................................... 3

Accessories ............................................................... 6

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 6

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)

and Floppy Disk..................................................... 7

About the Display Messages.................................... 8

Application Index................................................... 12

What can you do with the PSR-A1000?................. 14

Setting Up the PSR-A1000 ..................................... 16

Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18

Quick Guide ........................... 20

Playing the Demos ................................................. 20

Song Playback ........................................................ 21

Playback of Songs ....................................................21

Playing Voices ........................................................ 25

Playing a Voice ........................................................25

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26

Playing Different Voices with the Left and

Right Hands..........................................................27

Playing Styles ......................................................... 28

Playing a style..........................................................28

Style Sections...........................................................30

Playing with the Songs .......................................... 32

Playing Along with the PSR-A1000...........................32

Recording ................................................................33

Setting an Oriental Scale ....................................... 34

Basic Operations

— Organizing Your Data ....... 35

Example — Open/Save display for Voice..................36

Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 37

File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 38

Naming Files/Folders ...............................................38

Moving Files/Folders ................................................39

Copying Files/Folders...............................................40

Deleting Files/Folders...............................................40

Saving Files ..............................................................41

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............41

Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................41

Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................41

Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 43

Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 44

Help Messages ....................................................... 46

Using the Metronome............................................ 47

Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 47

Tap Tempo ..............................................................48

Reference

Playing the Demos.................49

Voices.....................................51

Selecting a Voice .................................................... 51

Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds

Simultaneously .................................................... 53

Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 53

Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and

Right Sections of the Keyboard ............................ 54

Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 54

PITCH BEND Wheel................................................ 55

Adjusting the Octave setting ................................. 55

Styles......................................56

Playing a style ........................................................ 56

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 58

Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 58

Chord Fingerings.................................................... 59

Arranging the Style Pattern

(SECTIONS: MAIN A/

B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)..................................61

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys

(SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 62

Selecting Intro and Ending Types

(INTRO/ENDING) ................................................ 63

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing

accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 63

The Multi Pads .......................64

Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 64

Chord Match .......................................................... 64

Multi Pad Edit......................................................... 65

Song Playback........................66

Compatible Song Types ......................................... 66

Song Playback ........................................................ 67

Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 67

Playing Back Songs on Disk..................................... 69

Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 69

Muting Specific Parts

— Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks............................ 70

Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 70

Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 71

PSR-A1000

Using Oriental Scales –

Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/

Scale Memory ........................ 72

Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting............. 72

Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning ......... 72

Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory .... 74

Saving Your Scale Settings .................................... 74

Recalling the Scale Setting .................................... 75

Saving and Recalling

Custom Panel Setups

— Registration Memory ........ 76

Registering Panel Setups

— Registration Memory...................................... 76

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.................77

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 78

Editing Voices

— Sound Creator ................... 79

Operation ............................................................... 79

Sound Creator Parameters .................................... 80

Recording Your Performances

and Creating Songs

— Song Creator ..................... 83

About Song Recording........................................... 83

Quick Recording..................................................... 84

Multi Recording ..................................................... 85

Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 87

Operation ................................................................87

Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ..............89

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto

Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord)..............90

Select the Recording Options: Starting,

Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode........... 92

Editing a Recorded Song ....................................... 93

Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel.......93

Editing Note Events — 1 - 16...................................96

Editing Chord Events — CHD...................................97

Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)

..97

Inputting and Editing Lyrics .....................................98

Customizing the Event List — Filter..........................98

Creating Accompaniment Styles

— Style Creator ..................... 99

About Creating Accompaniment Styles ................ 99

Style File Format .................................................. 100

Operation ............................................................. 100

Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 101

Step Recording..................................................... 102

Assembling an Accompaniment Style

—Assembly ........................................................ 103

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 104

Change the Rhythmic Feel

— Groove and Dynamics ................................... 104

Editing the Channel Data...................................... 106

Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter ..... 107

Creating Multi Pad

— Multi Pad Creator ............109

Operation ............................................................. 109

Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record ............ 110

Start recording...................................................... 110

Stop recording...................................................... 110

Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit...... 111

Adjust the Volume Balance

and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console ................112

Operation ............................................................. 112

Setting the Level Balance and Voice

— Volume/Voice ............................................... 113

Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 114

Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 114

Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 115

Effect Structure ..................................................... 117

Making Global and Other

Important Settings

— Function...........................118

Operation ............................................................. 118

Fine Tuning the Pitch — Master Tune................. 120

Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 120

Setting Song-related Parameters

— Song Settings................................................ 121

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related

Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point,

and Chord Fingering......................................... 122

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters

— Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 122

Setting the Fingering Method

— Chord Fingering ............................................ 123

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard

— Controller...................................................... 123

Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 123

Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose

— Keyboard/Panel............................................. 125

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,

and Voice Set..................................................... 126

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration

Memory Presets — Registration Sequence.......... 126

PSR-A1000

Introduction

Quick Guide

Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data

Playing the Demos

Voices

Styles

The Multi Pad

Creating Multi Pad - Multi Pad Creator

Song Playback

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

- Registration Memory

Using Oriental Scales - Scale Setting/

Scale Tuning/Scale Memory

Editing Voices - Sound Creator

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs

- Song Creator

Creating Accompaniment Styles

- Style Creator

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

- Mixing Console

Making Global and Other Important Settings

- Function

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices

Appendix

Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .....................126

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice

Settings — Voice Set...........................................127

Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 127

Setting the MIDI Parameters............................... 129

Making Overall System Settings

(Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System.................129

Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................130

Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................131

Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................131

Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............131

Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 132

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,

Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............132

Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number

Indication — CONFIG 2......................................133

Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk...................134

Entering Your Name and Language Preference

— Owner............................................................135

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset ......................135

Using Your PSR-A1000

with Other Devices.............. 136

Using the Headphones (PHONES jack)...................136

Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through

an external audio system, and recording the

sounds to an external recorder

(AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks) ..................................136

Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller

(FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack).......................................137

Connecting external MIDI devices

(MIDI terminals) .................................................137

Connecting to a Computer

(MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................138

What’s MIDI?.........................................................139

What You Can Do With MIDI.................................142

Data Compatibility.................................................142

Disk format ............................................................142

Sequence Format...................................................143

Voice Allocation Format .........................................143

Troubleshooting.................. 144

Specifications ...................... 146

Index ................................... 148

PSR-A1000

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your particular

application and situation.

Listening

Listening to the internal songs................................................................................................................ page 67

Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 69

Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 49

Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 51

Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR-A1000................................................................ page 113

Playing

Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 125

Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 53

Playing separate voices with the right and left hands

...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 54

Changing the sound

Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects ......................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 54

.................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 115

Adjusting the Level Balance................................................................................................................. page 113

Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 53

Playing separate voices with the right and left hands

...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 54

Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 79

Playing the auto accompaniment

Playing the accompaniment automatically............................................................................................. page 56

Practicing

Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 47

Recording

Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 84, 85

Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 87

Creating your original settings

Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 79

Creating accompaniment styles.............................................................................................................. page 99

Creating multi pads.............................................................................................................................. page 109

PSR-A1000

Application Index

Settings

Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 76

Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 120

Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 121

Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 122

Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 125

Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 129

Connecting the PSR-A1000 to other devices

Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 139

Recording your performance.............. ”Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system,

and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 136

Raising the volume ............................ ”Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system,

and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 136

Connecting a computer........... .”Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals)” on page 138

Quick solution

Basic functions of the PSR-A1000 and how you can best use it.......................................................pages 12, 14

Resetting the PSR-A1000 to the default setting

........................“Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset” on page 135

Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 144

PSR-A1000

What can you do with the PSR-A1000?

SONG

Playback previously recorded

songs (page 21, 32, 66)

Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs

as well as songs on commercially

available disks.

DEMO

Explore the Demos

(page 20, 49)

These not only showcase the

stunning voices and styles of

the instrument, they introduce

you to the various functions

and features — and give you

hands-on experience using the

PSR-A1000!

STYLE

Back up your performance with Auto

Accompaniment (page 28, 56)

Playing a chord with your left hand automatically

plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an

accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin,

etc. — and let the PSR-A1000 be your backing

band!

DIGITAL RECORDING

Record your performances

(page 83, 99)

With the powerful and easy-to-use song

recording features, you can record your

own keyboard performances, and create

your own complete, fully orchestrated

compositions — which you can then save to

the USER drive or a ﬂoppy disk for future

recall.

SCALE SETTING/

SCALE MEMORY

The Scale Setting feature lets you

easily lower the pitches of speciﬁc

notes by 50 cents to create your own

oriental scales. Up to six scale

settings can be stored for instant

recall (Scale Memory), whenever you

need them.

PSR-A1000

LCD

The large LCD (together with

the various panel buttons)

provides comprehensive and

easy-to-understand control of

the PSR-A1000’s operations.

SCALE TUNING

You can select a desired scale

template including oriental

scales and create your own

scales by ﬁne tuning the scale

notes.

VOICE

Enjoy a huge variety of realistic

voices (page 25, 51)

The PSR-A1000 features a wealth of

exceptionally authentic and dynamic

voices — including piano, strings,

woodwinds, and more!

TO HOST terminal

Make music with a computer — quickly and

easily (page 138)

Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of

computer music software. Connections and setup

are exceptionally easy, and you can play back

your computer recorded parts with different

instrument sounds — all from a single PSR-

A1000!

Multi Pads

Add spice to your performance with special dynamic

phrases (page 64, 109)

By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads, you can play short

rhythmic or melodic phrases. You can also create your original

Multi Pad phrases by recording them directly from the

keyboard.

PSR-A1000

Setting Up the PSR-A1000

Make sure that the PSR-A1000’s STANDBY/ON

switch is at the STANDBY (off) position.

Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA-300.

Connect the PA-300’s DC plug to the PSR-A1000’s

DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear panel.

Connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the

nearest electrical outlet.

WARNING

Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA-

300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an

incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR-

A1000, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS

UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET

WHEN THE PSR-A1000 IS NOT IN USE.

CAUTION

Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor)

during any PSR-A1000 record operation! Doing so can result in

a loss of data.

CAUTION

Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity

is still ﬂowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not

using the PSR-A1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to

unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

When you have made all the necessary connections

(page 136) between your PSR-A1000 and any other

devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned

down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in

your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI

slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers,

ampliﬁers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI

operation and prevents speaker damage.

When powering down the setup, ﬁrst turn down the

volume for each audio device, then switch off each

device in the reverse order (ﬁrst audio devices, then

MIDI).

Power Supply

DC IN

To electrical outlet

Power-on Procedure

MIDI master (transmitting device)

Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier)

12345678910111213141516LR

PSR-A1000 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device)

POWER

ON!!

PSR-A1000

CAUTION

In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected

electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the PSR-A1000

before switching on the power of the ampliﬁed speakers or mixer and

ampliﬁer. Likewise,always switch off the power of the PSR-A1000

after switching off the power of the ampliﬁed speakers or mixer and

ampliﬁer.

CAUTION

Even when the switch is in the "STANDBY" position,electricity is still

ﬂowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the

PSR-A1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC

power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Before you switch your PSR-A1000 on or off, ﬁrst turn down the vol-

ume of any connected audio equipment.

1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch.

→ The main display appears in the display.

When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the

[STANDBY/ON] switch again.

→ Both the display and the drive lamp (at the

bottom left of the drive) will turn off.

2 Adjusting the display contrast

If the LCD is difﬁcult to read, adjust the

contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST]

knob on the rear panel.

3 Setting the volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME]

dial to adjust the volume to

an appropriate level.

The Panel Logos

The logos printed on the PSR-A1000 panel indicate standards/

formats it supports and special features it includes.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard

which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will

play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or

synthesizer from any manufacturer.

XG Format

XG is a new Yamaha MIDI speciﬁcation which signiﬁcantly

expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard

with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and

effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By

using the PSR-A1000 XG voices, it is possible to record XG-

compatible song ﬁles.

XF Format

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)

standard with greater functionality and open-ended

expandability for the future. The PSR-A1000 is capable of

displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle containing lyric data is played.

(SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence ﬁles.

The PSR-A1000 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and

records “song” data using SMF Format 0.)

Disk Orchestra Collection

The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback

compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and

MIDI devices.

Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format,

which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality

automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord

types. The PSR-A1000 uses the SFF internally, reads optional

SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator

feature.

Powering Up

STANDBY

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

LAYER

LCD

CONTRAST

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

Music Stand

The PSR-A1000 is supplied with a music stand that can

be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the

slot at the rear of the control panel.

PSR-A1000

Panel Controls and Terminals

POWER

[STANDBY/ON] switch ......................................................... P. 17

WHEEL

PITCH BEND ....................................................................... P. 55

PHONES

[PHONES] jack................................................................... P. 136

METRONOME

[METRONOME] button ........................................................ P. 47

SONG

[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ...................................... P. 70

[TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................ P. 70

[TRACK 1 (R)] button ........................................................... P. 70

[REPEAT] button .................................................................. P. 70

[REC] button......................................................................... P. 83

[TOP] button......................................................................... P. 69

[START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 67

[REW] button........................................................................ P. 69

[FF] button............................................................................ P. 69

STYLE

STYLE buttons..................................................................... P. 56

SCALE SETTING

[SCALE SETTING] buttons.................................................. P. 72

SCALE MEMORY

[MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 74

[SCALE MEMORY] buttons ................................................. P. 74

MASTER VOLUME

[MASTER VOLUME] dial...................................................... P. 17

STYLE CONTROL

[ACMP] button ......................................................................P. 57

[BREAK] button....................................................................P. 61

[INTRO] button ............................................................... P. 31, 63

MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 61

MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 61

MAIN [C] button.................................................................... P. 61

MAIN [D] button.................................................................... P. 61

[ENDING / rit.] button ..................................................... P. 31, 63

[AUTO FILL IN] button.......................................................... P. 63

[FADE IN / OUT] button........................................................ P. 62

[SYNC.STOP] button............................................................ P. 62

[SYNC.START] button ..........................................................P. 57

[START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 57

DIGITAL STUDIO

[SOUND CREATOR] button ................................................. P. 79

[DIGITAL RECORDING] button...................................... P. 83, 99

[MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 112

[DEMO] button ..................................................................... P. 49

[HELP] button....................................................................... P. 46

[FUNCTION] button............................................................ P. 118

CLICK

42 44

5554 56

58 61

40 46 49

12 13

7 8

23 31

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

PSR-A1000

DISPLAY CONTROL

[A] - [J] buttons..................................................................... P. 37

[DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................... P. 44

[BALANCE] button ............................................................... P. 58

[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ........................................ P. 58, 69

[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ................................................. P. 35 - 42

[BACK] button ................................................................ P. 37, 43

[NEXT] button................................................................. P. 37, 43

VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button ................................ P. 53

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button .............................. P. 53

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button................................. P. 53

[ENTER] button.................................................................... P. 43

[DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 43

[EXIT] button ........................................................................ P. 37

[LCD CONTRAST] knob ...................................................... P. 17

VOICE EFFECT

[LEFT HOLD] button ............................................................ P. 55

[TOUCH] button ................................................................... P. 54

[SUSUTAIN] button .............................................................. P. 54

[HARMONY / ECHO] button ................................................ P. 55

[MONO] button..................................................................... P. 55

[DSP] button......................................................................... P. 54

[VARIATION] button ............................................................. P. 55

VOICE

VOICE buttons ..................................................................... P. 51

TRANSPOSE

[E] [F] buttons ............................................................. P. 125

TEMPO

[E] [F] buttons ............................................................... P. 47

[TAP TEMPO] button............................................................P. 48

UPPER OCTAVE

[UPPER OCTAVE] button..................................................... P. 55

SCALE TUNING

[SCALE TUNING] button...................................................... P. 72

MULTI PAD

[1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 64

[STOP] button....................................................................... P. 64

REGISTRATION MEMORY

[FREEZE] button..................................................................P. 78

[1] – [8] buttons .................................................................... P. 76

[MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 76

FLOPPY DISK

Floppy disk drive (3.5")........................................................... P. 7

Connectors

[TO HOST] terminal ...........................................................P. 138

[HOST SELECT] switch ..................................................... P. 138

MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals................................................... P. 137

[FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack...................................... P. 137

[FOOT PEDAL 2] jack ........................................................ P. 136

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks ............................. P. 136

OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................... P. 136

DC IN terminal ................................................................... P. 136

68 70

74 75

81 82

L M

9392 94

52 53 57 5854

7574

Quick Guide

Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Playing the Demos

The PSR-A1000 features an extensive variety of Demo

songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its

dynamic rhythms and styles.

What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo

functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of

all the important features and functions of the instrument

— letting you see ﬁrsthand how to effectively use the

PSR-A1000 in your own music.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve ﬁnished playing the

demo songs.

When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PSR-A1000 even better with these functions:

• Song playback (page 21)

• Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26).

Reference

on page 49

Demo button

BACK NEXT

For this example, FUNCTION

is selected. Function Demos

demonstrate each of the

different functions on the

PSR-A1000.

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

2 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo

categories.

Voice Demos showcase the

voices of the PSR-A1000.

Style Demos introduce you

to the rhythms and accom-

paniment styles of the PSR-

A1000 (page 49).

1 Press the [DEMO] button

automatically plays

back the Demo

songs at random.

Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs.

For this example, press the [8▼] (AUTO) button.

All of the function demos are played back in sequence.

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

For details about the Demos,

refer to page 49.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

Song Playback

Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of

the PSR-A1000 come together — in songs!

The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR-A1000. Refer to pages 66, 142 for more details on the

logos.

Playback of Songs

1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive.

Reference

on page 67

Song related buttons

Floppy disk drive

BALANCE and

CHANNEL buttons

Make sure that the Lan-

guage setting for the instru-

ment (page 135) is the same

as that of the ﬁle name of the

song that you are playing

back.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices deﬁned in the GM standard.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM

standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices deﬁned in Yamaha’s DOC format.

Songs containing a large

amount of data may not be

able to be read properly by

the instrument, and as such

you may not be able to

select them. The maximum

capacity is about 200–

300KB, however this may

differ depending on the data

contents of each song.

• Make sure to read the

section “Using the Floppy

Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks” on page 7.

CAUTION

Song Playback

Quick Guide

2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

3 Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.

In the example display at left, the PRESET page is

selected; at right, FLOPPY DISK is selected.

PRESET (Songs for Demos)

FLOPPY DISK (commercially available

songs, your own songs, etc.)

From the MAIN display (the

display shown when the

power is turned on), you can

select songs, voices, accom-

paniment styles, etc.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

4 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select the song ﬁle.

5 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

6 While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on —

letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the ﬂy!

1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button.

2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off.

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

• To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button.

• With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the

lyrics on the display during playback. See page 71 for details.

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

81 2 3 4 5 6 781 2 3 4 5 6 7

If the STYLE tab is

selected, press this button

again.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels

of the individual parts — the song, the style, and your playing.

1) Press the [BALANCE] button.

2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

BALANCE

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

You can call up a full set of

mixing controls by pressing

the [MIXING CONSOLE]

button (page 112).

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

• The [FADE IN/OUT] but-

ton (page 62) can be used

to produce smooth fade-

ins and fade-outs when

starting and stopping the

song, as well as the

accompaniment.

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

Playing Voices

The PSR-A1000 features a stunning variety of over 700 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try

playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how

to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands.

Playing a Voice

1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press the [F] button to call up the menu for

selecting MAIN voice.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

2 Select a voice group.

Reference

on page 51

Voice related buttons

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

The voice you’re selecting

here belongs to the MAIN

part, and is called the MAIN

voice. (See page 53 for more

information.)

Yo u ’ll want to hear the MAIN

voice all by itself — so make sure

that the LAYER and LEFT parts

are turned off.

Turn MAIN on.

For this example, STRINGS

is selected.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]

button to select the memory

location of the voice. For this

example, PRESET is

selected.

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

3 Select a voice.

4 Play the voices.

Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also

have the PSR-A1000 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲]

button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn

the LAYER part on.

2 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part.

3 Select a voice group.

Here, we’ll select a lush pad to ﬁll out the sound. Call up

the “CHOIR & PAD” group.

4 Select a voice.

For example, select “Gothic Vox.”

5 Play the voices.

Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich

sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the

previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve

selected here.

And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features:

• Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 79).

• Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need

them (page 76).

For this example,

”Strings” is

selected.

Press the corresponding buttons to select the

other pages — and discover even more voices.

Press the [8▲] button to start the

Demo for the selected voice. To stop

the Demo, press this button again.

There’s more to the Demo features

than just voices, though–for more

information, see page 49.

• You can instantly jump

back to the Main display

by “double-clicking” on

one of the [A] - [J] buttons.

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT

part on.

2 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part.

3 Select a voice group.

Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play

rich, orchestral chords with your left hand.

4 Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display.

For example, select “Symphon. Str.”

5 Call up the SPLIT POINT display (page 122). From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that

separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button

and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 122.)

6 Play the voices.

The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while

the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or

voices).

MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right

hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand.

7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

Split Point

LEFT

MAIN/LAYER

EXIT

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

The PSR-A1000 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your own

performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion

accompaniment to a full band or orchestra.

Playing a style

1 Select a style group and a style.

2 Turn ACMP on.

The speciﬁed left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” area, and chords played

in this area are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the

selected style.

Reference

on page 56

Style related buttons

For this example,

VienneseWaltz is selected.

For this example, DANCE &

BALLROOM is selected.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to

select the memory location of the

style. For this example, PRESET is

selected.

Auto Accompaniment

area

Split Point

ACMP

• The point on the keyboard

that separates the auto

accompaniment area and

the right-hand area of the

keyboard is called the

“split point.” Refer to

page 122 for instructions

on setting the split point.

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

3 Turn SYNC.START on.

4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

5 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary.

Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its

original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display.

6 Try playing other chords with your left hand.

For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 59.

7 Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style.

And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features:

• Easily create your own original styles (page 79).

• Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need

them (page 76).

Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects

This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your

right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too.

1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on.

2 Turn ACMP on (page 28).

3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the

keyboard.

The PSR-A1000 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 127).

The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice.

• Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of

the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 54).

SYNC.

START

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

area

The Tempo can also be

adjusted by using the [TAP

TEMPO] button (page 48).

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

VOICE EFFECT

For details about Harmony/

Echo types, refer to the sep-

arate Data List.

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

Style Sections

Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic

style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings,

Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professional-

sounding arrangements.

1 - 3 Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29.

4 Press the [INTRO] button.

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

When the playback of the intro is ﬁnished, it automatically leads into main section.

6 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK]

button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure

on the next page.)

7 Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a ﬁll-in, if

necessary.

Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in

the Main sections.

8 Press the [ENDING] button.

This switches to the ending section. When the ending is

ﬁnished, the style automatically stops.

INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the

main section.

MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures,

and repeats indeﬁnitely until another section’s button is pressed.

BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your

performance sound even more professional.

ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops

automatically.

INTRO

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

BREAK

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

area

INTRO

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

BREAK

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

INTRO

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

BREAK

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

■ Accompaniment Structure

Other Controls

FADE IN/OUT The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 62)when starting and stopping

the style.

TAP TEMPO The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details,

see page 48.

SYNC.STOP When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in

the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your

performance. For details, see page 62.

INTRO (page xx)

MAIN VARIATION

Press the [ENDING] button.

INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C

ENDING (page xx)

ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C

INTRO D

ENDING D

You can have the

ending gradually slow

down (ritardando) by

pressing the [ENDING]

button again while the

ending is playing back.

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

via BREAK

(max. four patterns)

INTRO (page 63)

ENDING (page 63)

• An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by

simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point.

• Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the ﬁnal eighth

note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in.

• Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want.

• If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing.

• If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section.

FADE

IN/OUT

TAP TEMPO

SYNC.

STOP

Playing with the Songs

Quick Guide

Playing with the Songs

Playing Along with the PSR-A1000

In this section, try using the PSR-A1000’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you

play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform.

1 - 4 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23.

5 Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part.

6 If you want to see the lyrics, press the [B] button.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part.

If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[ ] [ ]

buttons.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

Reference

on page 66

Song related

buttons

(R)

TRACK

To cancel the left hand part,

press the [TRACK 2] button.

If the selected song does not

contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed.

• If you want to start the song right

away without an intro, use the Sync

Start function. To set Sync Start to

standby, simultaneously hold down

the [TOP] button and press the

SONG [START/STOP] button. Song

playback starts automatically the

moment you start playing the melody.

• If you can hear the PSR-A1000 play-

ing the melody part as well, check

the channel setting for the melody

part in the song data, and change

the channel assigned to Track 1

(page 121). You can also change the

song channel itself permanently

(page 94).

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

Playing with the Songs

Quick Guide

Recording

The PSR-A1000 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your

keyboard performance.

1 - 3 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26.

4 Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song” for recording.

5 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button.

6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard.

7 When you’ve ﬁnished recording, press the [REC] button.

8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by

using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

9 Save the recorded data as required (pages 35, 41).

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

REC

SONG

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

REC

The recorded data will be

lost if you turn off the power.

To keep your important

recordings, you’ll need to

save them to the User drive

or ﬂoppy disk.

CAUTION

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

Setting an Oriental Scale

Quick Guide

Setting an Oriental Scale

The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of speciﬁc notes by 50 cents to create your

own oriental scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory),

whenever you need them.

1 The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). Press the button

corresponding to the key whose pitch you want to lower (the button lights). Press again to return to normal

pitch.

2 The scale settings you set are memorized by the Scale Memory function.

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY

buttons. You can recall the memorized setting by pressing the appropriate

button at any time.

Reference

on page 72

Scale related

buttons

To maintain the memorized

scale settings even after the

power is turned off, make

sure to save the settings as

a ﬁle (page 74).

In the SCALE TUNE display,

you can select a desired

scale template including ori-

ental scales and create your

own scales by ﬁne tuning the

scale notes (page 72).

PSR-A1000

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

The PSR-A1000 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs, multi pads and

registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR-A1000; you can also

create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument.

All this data is stored in separate ﬁles — just as is done on a computer.

Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the

PSR-A1000 in ﬁles and folders.

Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these

displays according to their respective ﬁle types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data

efﬁciently by putting various ﬁles of the same type into a single folder.

The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN

display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button.

The following Open/Save dis-

play types are also available;

however, these are selected

from displays other than the

MAIN display (page 135

• SYSTEM SETUP

• MIDI SETUP

• USER EFFECT

Open/Save display for

Song (page 67)

handles the Song ﬁles.

Open/Save display for

Voice (page 51)

handles the Voice ﬁles.

Open/Save display for Style

(page 56)

handles the Style ﬁles.

Open/Save display for

Registration Bank (page 77)

handles the Registration Bank

ﬁles.

Open/Save display for

Multi Pads (page 64, 109)

handles the Multi Pad Bank

ﬁles.

If the MAIN screen is not dis-

played, press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button followed by

the [EXIT] button.

Open/Save display for Scale

Bank (page 72)

handles the Scale Tune Bank

ﬁles.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Example — Open/Save display for Voice

Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages.

BACK NEXT

PRESET drive

The ﬁles that are pre-

programmed and installed

internally to the PSR-A1000 are

kept here. Preset ﬁles can be

loaded but cannot be re-written.

However, you can use a preset

ﬁle as a basis for creating your

own original ﬁle (which can be

saved in the USER or FLOPPY

DISK drive).

USER drive

Files kept here are those

containing your own original

data, created or edited using the

various functions of the PSR-

A1000. They are stored internally

to the PSR-A1000.

FLOPPY DISK drive

You can also store your original

data to ﬂoppy disk.

Commercially available disk

software can also be called up

here. Naturally, these ﬁles are

available only when the

appropriate disk is inserted in

the ﬂoppy disk drive.

File

All data, both pre-

programmed and your own

original, are stored as “ﬁles.”

Current Memory

“Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you

select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the

SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved

as a ﬁle in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive.

Recording songs (page 83) and creating accompaniment styles

(page 99) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to

properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a ﬁle or

ﬁles. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving.

Calls up the upper

level directory page.

In this example, the

voice folder selection

page can be called

up.

Changes drives among

PRESET, USER and

FLOPPY DISK.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Select a ﬁle shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice ﬁle.

First, press the VOICE [PIANO] button to call up the display containing the ﬁles.

This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store ﬁles (voice ﬁles).

The PSR-A1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices

created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section.

Selecting Files and Folders

ENTER

DATA ENTRY

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

END

Select “PRESET,” “USER,” or “FLOPPY

DISK” by using the [BACK][NEXT]

button.

Use the [1▲] ~ [7▲] buttons to

turn the pages.

When the available number of pages

exceeds eight, the bottom of the display

changes as shown below.

Press Next

Press Prev.(previous)

Select the ﬁle/folder.

There are two ways to select the ﬁle/folder:

• Press the [A] - [J] button.

Press the letter button corresponding to the

ﬁle/folder you wish to call up. (In the example

display shown above, the voice ﬁles are

shown.)

• Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the

[ENTER] button.

When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the

highlight moves among the available ﬁles/

folders. Highlight the desired ﬁle or folder

(voice ﬁles are shown in the example above)

and press the [ENTER] button to call up the

selected item.

Double-clicking the

appropriate [A] -[J] button

calls up the corresponding

ﬁle and returns to the MAIN

display.

Highlighting the desired ﬁle

and double-clicking the

[ENTER] button calls up the

corresponding ﬁle and

returns to the MAIN display.

Press the [EXIT] button

to go back to the MAIN

display.

You can go back to the

previous display by

pressing the [EXIT]

button.

Exiting from small pop-up

windows

You can also exit from small

pop-up windows (such as in the

illustration below) by pressing

the [EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Naming Files/Folders

You can assign names to ﬁles and folders. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or

renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset ﬁles/folders you wish to

rename, copy them beforehand (page 40) and use them as User ﬁles/folders.

File/Folder-related Operations

END

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 35).

The NAME display appears.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] -

[J] buttons.

To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Input the new name (page 42).

Press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

A ﬁle/folder name can con-

tain up to 50 half size letters

(or 25 Hiragana and kanji let-

ters), including the Icon ID

(see the note below) and the

extension.

The ﬁle name will appear on

your computer as follows. If

you change the Icon ID or

the extension, the icon may

change or the ﬁle may not be

properly recognized.

ABCDE.S002.MID

File ID Icon ID

Extension

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Moving Files/Folders

You can move ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below.

END

Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 35).

The CUT display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder for moving.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] -

[J] buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel

the selection, press the button of the selected ﬁle/folder again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the ﬁles/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY

DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to

release or cancel the selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

This operation cannot be

used to directly move a ﬁle/

folder from one ﬂoppy disk to

another. If you want to do

this, cut and paste the ﬁle or

folder from the ﬁrst ﬂoppy

disk to the USER page, then

change disks and paste it to

the FLOPPY DISK page.

All ﬁles/folders in a ﬂoppy

disk can be copied to

another disk in one batch

(page 134).

Call up the destination display.

Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.

Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button.

The ﬁle/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination.

After being pasted, the ﬁles

are automatically re-ordered

in alphabetical order and

displayed.

About ﬁles/folders in a

ﬂoppy disk

In the FLOPPY DISK page

of the Open/Save display,

only the ﬁles which can be

handled in that Open/Save

display will appear — even

though a folder in a ﬂoppy

disk can contain different

kinds of ﬁles.

In the case of a folder cut-

and-paste operation (for

ﬂoppy disk), an entire folder

can be cut; however, only the

speciﬁc ﬁles which can be

handled in the current Open/

Save display will be pasted.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Copying Files/Folders

You can also copy ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the PRESET, USER and

FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below.

Deleting Files/Folders

You can also delete ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections can be deleted, using the operation described below.

END

Press the [3▼] (COPY) button (page 35).

The COPY display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] - [J]

buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the

selection, press the button of the selected ﬁle/folder again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the ﬁles/folders in the currently selected folder (PRESET/

USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to

“ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK)

button.

To stop the operation,

press the [8▼] (CANCEL)

button.

This operation cannot be

used to directly copy a ﬁle/

folder from one ﬂoppy disk to

another. If you want to do

this, copy and paste the ﬁle

or folder from the ﬁrst ﬂoppy

disk to the User page, then

change disks and paste it to

the Floppy Disk page.

Call up the destination

display.

Only the USER and FLOPPY

DISK pages can be selected

as the destination.

Press the [4▼]

(PASTE) button.

The ﬁle/folder you copied

is now pasted at the

destination.

Please note that the copy

functions are intended for

your personal use only.

END

Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 35).

The DELETE display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK)

button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select

another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected together, even

those from other pages. To release or cancel the

selection, press the button of the selected ﬁle/folder

again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the ﬁles/folders

in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the

[6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button

changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the

selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL)

button.

The message “Are you sure you want to delete the

“******” ﬁle (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears.

YES ......... Deletes the highlighted item.

NO ........... Exits from the prompt without deleting.

When several ﬁles have been selected, the message

“Are you sure you want to delete the “******” ﬁle (or

data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears.

YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or

skips the highlighted item without deleting

(NO).

YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once.

CANCEL ....Exits from the prompt without deleting.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Saving Files

This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current

memory (page 36) to ﬁles. The ﬁles can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK

drives.

If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, ﬁrst return to

the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective

Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 35, 36).

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder

This operation lets you easily organize your various ﬁles into categories by creating a new

folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections.

Displaying Upper Level pages

Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from

the ﬁle level pages.

Entering Characters and Changing Icons

The internal memory capac-

ity of the PSR-A1000 is about

260KB. Memory capacity for

2DD and 2HD ﬂoppy disks is

about 720KB and 1440KB,

respectively. When you store

data to these locations, all ﬁle

types of the PSR-A1000

(Voice, Style, Song, Registra-

tion, etc.) are stored together.

The ﬁles of commercially

available DOC software and

Yamaha Disklavier software,

and their edited ﬁles on the

PSR-A1000, can be stored

in the USER page, but can-

not be copied to another

ﬂoppy disk.

Folder directories can con-

tain up to four levels.

The maximum total number

of ﬁles and folders which can

be stored is 400, but this

may differ depending on the

length of the ﬁle names.

The maximum number of

ﬁles which can be stored in a

folder will be 250.

Enter a name for the new ﬁle (page 42).

Press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Press the [6▼]

(SAVE) button.

Enter the name of the new folder (page 42).

Press the [8▲](OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Call up the page to

which you wish to

create a new folder

and press the [7▼]

(NEW) button

(page 35).

The following types of characters are

available:

CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size),

numbers (half size), marks (half size)

case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half

size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button.

Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing

the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon

at the left of the ﬁle name.

Press the [1▼]

(NAME), [6▼]

(SAVE), or [7▼]

(NEW) button

(page 35).

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Entering Characters

The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your ﬁles and folders. The method is much the

same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone.

Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter.

Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button.

To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button.

If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the

[7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the

[7▼] (DELETE) button for a while. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is

deleted.

To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent)

Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button

(before actual entry of the character.)

■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)

You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a

character by moving the cursor.

Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the

[8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button.

■ Entering numbers

Press and hold down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a

while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected.

The following half-size

marks cannot be used in

naming ﬁles and folders:

¥ \ / : * ? “ < > |

In the case of characters

which are not accompanied

by special character marks,

you can call up the mark list

by pressing the [6▼] button

after selecting a character

(before actual entry of a

character).

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Changing the Icon

You can also change the icon that

appears at the left of the ﬁle name.

Call up the ICON SELECT display by

pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from

the character input display (page 42).

Select the desired icon by using the

[A] - [J] buttons, or by using the

[3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter

the selected icon by pressing the [8▲]

(OK) button.

This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual

function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display.

■ Adjusting values

You can change parameter values by

rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the

example [BALANCE] display, turning

the dial adjusts the volume of the part

in reverse display (highlight). To adjust

the volume of another part, ﬁrst select

the part by pressing the [

▲▼] button

corresponding to the part, then rotate

the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

■ Selecting items

You can select the desired item or

function in the display by rotating the

[DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item

can then be called up or executed by

using the [ENTER] button.

In the example VOICE display, you

can select the desired voice ﬁle with

the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up

the selected item by pressing the

[ENTER] button on the panel.

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Cancels the icon selection operation.

Turns pages

for icon

selection.

Enters the

selected icon.

Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

DATA ENTRY

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional

button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the

appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that

display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 123).

Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 45) for a list of the displays that can be called up

with the Direct Access function.

Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays

DIRECT

ACCESS

DIRECT

ACCESS

ACMP

Here’s a convenient way to

return to the MAIN display

from any other display:

Simply press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button, then the

[EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Direct Access Chart

Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below Corresponding LCD display and function

See pages

SONG [TRACK1]

FUNCTION

SONG SETTING

TRACK1 CHANNEL selection 121

[TRACK2] TRACK2 CHANNEL selection 121

[EXTRA TRACKS]

121

[REPEAT]

[METRONOME] UTILITY METRONOME settings 132

[REC] —

[TOP] —

[START/STOP] —

[REW] —

[FF] —

STYLE [POP & ROCK] [LATIN & JAZZ]

FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 122

[DANCE & BALLROOM]

[] []

[USER]

SCALE SETTING buttons

SCALE TUNE BANK

SCALE TUNE BANK 72

SCALE MEMORY [MEMORY]

SCALE TUNE EDIT 74

[1]–[6]

STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] FUNCTION CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection 122

[BREAK]

MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART)

VOLUME/VOICE

VOICE settings

113[INTRO] PANPOT settings

MAIN [A] VOLUME settings

MAIN [B]

FILTER

HARMONIC CONTENT settings

114

MAIN [C] BRIGHTNESS settings

MAIN [D]

EFFECT

REVERB settings

115[ENDING/rit.] CHORUS settings

[AUTO FILL IN] DSP settings

[FADE IN/OUT]

FUNCTION

UTILITY FADE IN/OUT setting

122

[SYNC. STOP]

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT

SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting

[SYNC. START] —

[START/STOP] —

DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] —

[DIGITAL RECORDING] —

[MIXING CONSOLE] —

MENU [DEMO]

FUNCTION

UTILITY

LANGUAGE selection 135

[HELP] LCD BRIGHTNESS settings 133

[FUNCTION] MIDI MIDI settings 129

[DIRECT ACCESS] Exit from the Direct Access mode

[BALANCE]

MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) VOLUME/VOICE

VOLUME settings

113

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] VOICE settings

[NEXT] —

[BACK] —

VOICE PART [MAIN]

MIXING CONSOLE TUNE OCTAVE settings 114[LAYER]

[LEFT]

[SCALE TUNING] SCALE TUNE BANK SCALE TUNE BANK 32

[EXIT] Return to the MAIN display

[ENTER] —

VOICE EFFECT [LEFT HOLD]

FUNCTION

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT

SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting 122

[TOUCH] CONTROLLER KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment 125

[SUSTAIN] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT REVERB settings 115

[HARMONY/ECHO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO 127

[MONO]

MIXING CONSOLE

TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME settings 114

[DSP]

EFFECT

DSP settings

115

[VARIATION] EFFECT TYPE selection

VOICE [PIANO]

FUNCTION VOICE SET settings 127

[ORGAN & ACCORDION]

[GUITAR]

[TRUMPET]

[SAX & FLUTE]

[STRINGS]

[CHOIR & PAD]

[SYNTHESIZER]

[XG]

[]

[PERCUSSION]

[USER]

TRANSPOSE

[]

FUNCTION

CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE assignment 125

[] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE TRANSPOSE settings 114

TEMPO [ ]

FUNCTION

MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 129

[]

[TAP TEMPO] UTILITY TAP settings 133

UPPER OCTAVE [ ] —

[] —

MULTI PAD [1]

MULTI PAD MULTI PAD EDIT 64

[2]

[3]

[4]

[STOP] DIGITAL RECORDING MULTI PAD CREATOR REPEAT / CHORD MATCH settings 110

REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] FUNCTION FREEZE 126

[1]

REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the RAGISTRATION) 77

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[MEMORY]

FUNCTION

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) 126

PEDAL [PEDAL1]

CONTROLLER

PEDAL1 function assignment

123

[PEDAL2] PEDAL2 function assignment

WHEEL [PITCH BEND] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE PITCH BEND RANGE settings 114

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR-A1000.

Help Messages

HELP

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

ENTER

DATA ENTRY

BACK NEXT

EXIT

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

2-1 Select the desired

Help topic.

2-2 Call up the

topic.

Select the Language, if necessary. The

language selected here are also used for

various “Messages” shown during operations.

Help messages can be displayed in

any one of the following languages:

ENGLISH

GERMAN

FRENCH

When two or more pages available,

use this to select different pages.

Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual

setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word

(using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to

the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic.

Press this to return

to the previous

display.

END

The language can also be selected in

the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE”

(page 135) display.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and

check how a speciﬁc tempo sounds.

The metronome starts by pressing the [METRONOME]

button. Adjust the

tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below).

To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again.

This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of

a song or an accompaniment style.

Using the Metronome

METRO-

NOME

The sound, volume level,

and the beat (time signature)

of the metronome can all be

changed (page 132).

Adjusting the Tempo

TEMPO

TAP TEMPO

RESET

Songs and accompaniment

styles have been given

default (initial) tempo

settings, designed to best

suit the song/style.

TEMPO

TAP TEMPO

RESET

EXIT

Press either the TEMPO [ ]

button or the [] button.

Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ]

[] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

The number in the display indicates how many

quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The

range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value,

the faster the tempo.

When you change the tempo, both tempos of the

current song and style will be changed to the same

tempo. To restore their respective default (initial)

tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ]

buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo

Indications — MAIN display” (page 48) for more

about tempo.

1 2

Press this to

close the

TEMPO display.

END

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-A1000

Tap Tempo

This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style.

Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or

the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping.

■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display

There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below.

Hitting the [TAP TEMPO]

button produces a tapping

sound. You can change this

sound, if desired (page 133).

You can also use Tap Tempo

to automatically start the

song or accompaniment

style at the desired tempo.

While both the song and

accompaniment style are

stopped, tap the [TAP

TEMPO] button several

times, and the selected

accompaniment style starts

automatically at the tempo

you tapped. While a song is

set to Sync. Start stand-by

(page 57, 67), tapping the

[TAP TEMPO] button starts

the song playback in the

same manner. For songs

and styles in 2/4 and 4/4

time, tap four times; for 3/4

time, tap three times; for 5/4

time, tap ﬁve times.

TEMPO

TAP TEMPO

RESET

Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice

to change the tempo.

Playback the song or the

accompaniment style

(page 56, 67).

Indicates the default (initial) tempo

setting for the currently selected

song (unless the tempo has been

changed manually).

Indicates the current tempo for the

selected song, accompaniment

style or the metronome which is

now playing back. When nothing is

playing back (stopped), this

indicates the tempo for the selected

style. When the song and style are

played back simultaneously, the

tempo of the style is automatically

changed to match the tempo of the

song, and is displayed here. This

tempo is used for recording when

recording a song or

accompaniment style.

Indicates the default (initial) tempo

setting for the currently selected

accompaniment style (unless the

tempo has been changed

manually).

PSR-A1000

Reference

Playing the Demos

The PSR-A1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices

and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared

showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR-A1000.

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

2-3 Press one of these buttons

twice — once to select the

desired demo, and once

again to start it.

2-2 Use these to select

different display pages.

Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting

from the ﬁrst item at the top left of the display. This is available only

from the FUNCTION page.

All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one

at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button;

however, all demo songs are played back in sequence.

Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos

(otherwise available in step 3 below).

2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category.

Function Demos........ These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR-A1000.

Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices of the PSR-A1000.

Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSR-A1000.

Pressing the [DEMO] button

automatically plays back the Demo songs

at random.

Playing the Demos

PSR-A1000

EXIT

END

Return to the MAIN screen.

ENTER

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

LAYER

This example shows the Sound System

in the FUNCTION demo.

For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and

the Demo starts playing.

Select the desired word or item by using the

[DATAENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER]

button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.)

to call it up.

Use the [BACK][NEXT]

buttons in the introduction

screen to call up the previ-

ous or next page.

Press the SONG [START/

STOP] button to stop the

Demo song. To start the

Demo again from the point

at which it was stopped,

press the SONG [START/

STOP] button again.

Rewind and fast-forward

can also be used with the

Demo songs (page 69).

PSR-A1000

Voices

The PSR-A1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings

and brass — and many, many more.

Selecting a Voice

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

Select the desired voice group.

The voice you’re selecting

here belongs to the MAIN

part, and is called the MAIN

voice. (See page 53 for more

information.)

Yo u ’ll want to hear the

MAIN voice all by itself —

so make sure that the

LAYER and LEFT parts

are turned off.

Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press [F] button to call

up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice.

When you select a voice

group, the last selected

voice will automatically be

selected.

Turn MAIN on.

Voices

PSR-A1000

Voice Characteristics

The voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the voice name.

Cool!

These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount

of memory and some very sophisticated programming.

Sweet!

These acoustic instrument sounds also beneﬁt from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so

ﬁnely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing!

Drum

Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the

keyboard.

SFX

Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.

Keyboard Percussion

When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special

effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and

percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even

though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical.

Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.

END

EXIT

Play the keyboard to hear the

selected

voice.

Press this to return

to the MAIN

display.

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

3-3 Select the voice.

3-1 Select the

memory

location of

the voice

(PRESET/

USER/

FLOPPY

DISK).

Press this to start the

demo of the selected

voice. To stop the demo

at any time, press this

button again.

Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group.

Indicates that the display is for

selecting the MAIN voice (page 25).

3-2 Select the

various pages

in the current

voice group.

Selecting a voice automati-

cally selects the best-suited

effect and other settings for

that particular voice. You can

disable this so that settings

are not automatically

selected (page 127).

You can set how much the

volume of the voice changes

according to your playing

strength (page 125).

For a list of the available

voices, refer to the separate

Data List.

You can set whether the

voice bank and program

change numbers (“MSB-

LSB-Program Change num-

ber” at the right above the

voice name) are displayed or

not (page 133).

XG is a major enhancement

of the GM System level 1 for-

mat, and was developed by

Yamaha specially to provide

more voices and variations,

as well as greater expressive

control over voices and

effects, and to ensure com-

patibility of data well into the

future.

Voices

PSR-A1000

The PSR-A1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these

three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance.

Playing a layer of two voices

Playing two voices separately — on the left

and right sections of the keyboard

Playing three different voices — one on the

left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of

two on the right

Layer — Layering Two Different Voices

Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

LAYER part

MAIN part

LEFT part

MAIN part

Split point

Left range Right range

LEFT part

MAIN part

Split point

LAYER part

Left range Right range

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

EXIT

END

Press this to

turn the LAYER

function on. To

turn it off, press

the button again.

There is an alternate way for

quickly selecting both the

MAIN and LAYER voices

from the panel: While hold-

ing down one panel voice

button, press a second

voice button. The ﬁrst

selected voice becomes the

MAIN voice, and the second

becomes the LAYER.

Select Layer with the [G] button. Press the same

button to call up the VOICE display, from which you

can select the speciﬁc voice you want to play in a

layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a

voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN)

display (page 51).

Press this to

return to the

MAIN

display.

Voices

PSR-A1000

Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard

This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard.

■ TOUCH

This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When this is set to off, the same volume is produced no

matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.

■ SUSTAIN

When this Sustain feature is on, all notes played on the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER parts only) have a longer sustain. You

can also set the Sustain depth (page 82).

■ DSP

The PSR-A1000 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process

the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways — such

as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give

the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can

completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part

(MAIN/LAYER/LEFT).

Set the LEFT to

ON. Press this

button again to

set it to OFF.

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same

button to call up the VOICE display, from which

you can select the speciﬁc voice you want to play

in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the

way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 51).

The split point can be freely

set to any key on the key-

board. (page 122).

Each part (MAIN, LAYER,

and LEFT) can have its own

volume setting (page 58).

You can also use the LAYER

and LEFT functions

together, to create a combi-

nation layer/split. To do this,

set separate voices for the

left and right sections of the

keyboard (as indicated), and

set up a layer of two different

voices on the right.

EXIT

END

Press this to

return to the

MAIN display.

Applying Voice Effects

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

VOICE EFFECT

Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off.

For explanations on each of the effects, see below.

The DSP and VARIATION

effect types and the their

depth can be selected and

adjusted in the MIXING CON-

SOLE display (page 115).

Voices

PSR-A1000

■ VARIATION

This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected

type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 115), this lets you switch the rotor speed between

slow and fast.

■ HARMONY/ECHO

This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section

of the keyboard (page 127).

■ MONO

This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a

time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the

lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last

note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically.

Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the

Portamento effect, when playing in legato.

■ LEFT HOLD

This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the

same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when

used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the

auto accompaniment area of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set to

Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall accompaniment

sound.

Use the PSR-A1000 PITCH BEND wheel to

bend notes up (roll the wheel away from

you) or down (roll the wheel toward you)

while playing the keyboard. The PITCH

BEND wheel is self-centering and will

automatically return to normal pitch when

released.

The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously

transposed up or down by one octave.

You can add special empha-

sis to melody lines you play

over chords by using the

Layer function with a mono-

phonic voice. Set the Main

voice to play polyphonically

and set the Layer voice to

play monophonically

(MONO). In this case, the

melody you play — including

the top notes of any chords

— sounds monophonically.

Try this using the following

voices.

MAIN voice

: Brass Section

(polyphonic) +

LAYER voice

Sweet Trump (monophonic)

The Portamento effect creates

a smooth pitch glide between

successively played notes.

PITCH BEND Wheel

PITCH BEND

The maximum pitch bend

range can be changed

(page 114).

Adjusting the Octave setting

More detailed octave-related

settings for each part can be

made by using the Mixing

Console function

(page 114).

UPPER OCTAVE

RESET

PSR-A1000

Styles

The PSR-A1000 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz,

Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected

Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you

play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them.

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Playing a style

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

2-2 Select a Style.

2-1 Select a location

(Preset, User,

Floppy Disk) for

saving the style.

When you've opened a lower directory's

display, this button (UP) lets you call up

the next higher directory, from which you

can select Style groups.

For a list of the available

accompaniment styles,

refer to the separate

Data List.

Styles

PSR-A1000

ACMP INTROBREAK

STYLE CONTROL

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Auto Accompaniment area

Split point

END

When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto

accompaniment area of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be the

range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.)

Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on.

The Tempo can be adjusted

using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or

[TAP TEMPO] button.

If you tap the [TAP TEMPO]

button, the tempo will adjust to

the same speed that you tapped.

You can set the key range

for auto accompaniment

(page 122).

• You can begin the rhythm

channels (tracks) of the

Style by pressing the

[START/STOP] button.

• The rhythm channels of

the style can also be

started by tapping the

[TAP TEMPO] button.

With the style stopped,

tap the [TAP TEMPO]

button three, four or ﬁve

times (three for 3/4 time,

four for 2/4 or 4/4 time,

ﬁve for 5/4 time).

When you simultaneously

play back accompaniment

styles with a song, the

accompaniment parts

recorded to the song (chan-

nels 9 - 16) are temporarily

replaced by the selected

accompaniment style — let-

ting you try out and use dif-

ferent accompaniment with

the song (page 68).

Turn ACMP off.

Sync. Start

Enabling this lets you start

the style simply by playing

the keyboard.

As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment area, the style starts. For

details about chord ﬁngerings, refer to page 59.

Accompaniment Style Characteristics

The deﬁning characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display.

Session!

These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with

chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of

certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all

songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-bass

chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment.

Piano Combo! (Floppy Disk)

These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since

this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs.

START/STOP

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

Stop the style.

Styles

PSR-A1000

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only

Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Rhythm starts.

Select a style (page 56).

The Rhythm channels are

part of the styles. Each style

has different rhythm pat-

terns.

Set to off.

Play along with the rhythm playback.

The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons.

If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that

you tapped.

Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button

again to stop the rhythm playback.

END

You can also start the

rhythm simply by playing a

key on the keyboard, if Sync

Start is enabled (turn on the

[SYNC.START] button).

BALANCE

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

BALANCE display

Adjust the output level of the Part.

Parts played from the

keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/

LEFT)

STYLE part (Auto

Accompaniment area)

SONG part

MULTI PAD part

CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF]

button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to

only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for

the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply

press the appropriate channel button again.

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

in the song data

(page 141). The channels

are assigned as shown

below.

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Call up the

BALANCE

display.

Call up the

Channel ON/

OFF display.

Styles

PSR-A1000

The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of

ﬁngerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 123), and select the Chord Fingerings. The

page shows how to play chords with your left hand.

SINGLE FINGER

Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major,

seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment area of

the keyboard. The abbreviated chord ﬁngerings described below are used.

MULTI FINGER

The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ﬁngerings,

so you can use either type of ﬁngering without having to switch ﬁngering modes. If you

want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER

operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the

root of the chord.

FINGERED

This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto

accompaniment area of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord

types listed on the next page.

FINGERED ON BASS

This mode accepts the same ﬁngerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note

played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing

you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C major

chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C).

FULL KEYBOARD

This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar

to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example,

playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord

with your left hand and a melody note with your right.

AI FINGERED

This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three

notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).

AI FULL KEYBOARD

When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PSR-A1000 will automatically create appropriate

accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to

worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many

songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature.

This mode is similar to FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the

chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9

and 11

chords cannot be played.

Chord Fingerings

For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key

and a black key to its left.

For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root

key and a white key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the

root key and both a white and black key to its left.

Chord detection in the AI

Full Keyboard mode occurs

at approximately 8th-note

intervals. Extremely short

chords — less than an 8th

note in length — may not be

detected.

In Full Keyboard mode,

chords are detected based

on the lowest and second

lowest notes you play. If the

two lowest notes fall within a

single octave, those two

notes determine the chord. If

the lowest note and the sec-

ond lowest note are sepa-

rated by more than one

octave, the lowest note

becomes the bass and the

chord is determined from the

second lowest note and the

other notes played in the

same octave.

Artiﬁcial Intelligence

Styles

PSR-A1000

* Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion.

Chord Name [Abbreviation] Normal Voicing

Display for root “C”

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Ninth [9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C9

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C6

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7

]

1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7

CM7

Flatted ﬁfth [ 5] 1 - 3 - 5 C 5

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - 5 Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7aug

Minor [m] 1 - 3 - 5 Cm

Minor ninth [m9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 Cm9

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 Cm7

Minor seventh eleventh [m7

] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Cm7

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Cm7 5

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - 3 - 5 Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 C7

Seventh ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* C7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7

]

1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7

Seventh add thirteenth [7

] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 C7

Seventh sharp ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2

Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords)

( )

CM7

( )

Caug

Cm6

Cm7

( )

Cm7



CmM7



Cm7

( )

Cm9

CmM7

( )

CmM7

( )

Cdim

Cdim7

( )



( )



Csus4



( )

CM7



( )

CM7



( )



( )

C7aug

Cm7

( )

CM7aug

( )

C7sus4 Csus2

• Notes in parentheses can

be omitted.

• For FINGERED, FIN-

GERED ON BASS, and AI

FINGERED, if you play

any three adjacent keys

(including black keys), the

chord sound will be can-

celed and only the rhythm

instruments will continue

playing (Chord Cancel

function). This let you play

back only the rhythm.

• Playing two same root

keys in the adjacent

octaves produces accom-

paniment based only on

the root.

• A perfect ﬁfth (1 + 5) pro-

duces accompaniment

based on the root and the

ﬁfth.

• The auto accompaniment

Style will sometimes not

change when related

chords are played in

sequence (e.g. some

minor chords followed by

the minor seventh).

• You can also have the

PSR-A1000 “teach” you

how to play Fingered

chords. From the CHORD

FINGERING display

(page 123), specify the

chord you want to learn,

and the notes you should

press are indicated in the

display.

 



 













  

 





 





















 





Styles

PSR-A1000

The PSR-A1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Areas that allow you to

vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching

among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional-

sounding arrangement in your performance.

Arranging the Style Pattern

(SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)

You can also use this func-

tion to play only rhythms

(page 58).

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Auto Accompaniment area

Split point

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Select a style (page 56).

2-1 Turn the ACMP function on.

2-2 Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section

before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again.

2-3 Turn the SYNC. START function on.

The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto

Accompaniment area of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section.

Press this button to add breaks.

• If you press the [INTRO]

button, you can play back

an Intro section while an

accompaniment is play-

ing.

• You can dynamically con-

trol the level of the

accompaniment by how

softly or strongly you play

the keys in the Auto

Accompaniment area of

the keyboard (page 122).

• If you press the [SYNC.

START] button while an

accompaniment is play-

ing, the accompaniment

will stop and the PSR-

A1000 will enter Synchro-

nized Start standby sta-

tus.

• You can also change

style sections by using

the pedal (page 123).

• The Break section lets

you add dynamic varia-

tions and breaks in the

rhythm of the accompani-

ment, to make your per-

formance sound even

more professional. If you

press the [BREAK] but-

ton while an accompani-

ment is playing, the ﬁll-in

will play back for one

measure.

• The indicator of the desti-

nation section (MAIN A/

B/C/D) will ﬂash while the

Break is playing.

• When the [AUTO FILLIN]

button is set to on and the

MAIN [A][B] [C][D] but-

ton is pressed after the

ﬁnal half beat (eighth

note) of the measure, the

ﬁll-in will begin from the

next measure.

• Section button indications

— [BREAK], [INTRO],

[MAIN], [ENDING] but-

tons

LED is green

— The section is not

selected.

LED is red

— The section is cur-

rently selected.

LED is off

— No section data; the

section cannot be

played.

Main sections can be shifted.

Styles

PSR-A1000

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP)

When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, style playback will stop completely when all

keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard are released. Style playback will

start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment area is played.

Fade-in/Fade-out

The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that

gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in,

press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in

before starting the style, press the button again.

To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the

fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 132).

• Styles can also be started

by pressing the STYLE

[START/STOP] button.

• You can select the Intro

and Ending type by press-

ing the [E] button in the

MAIN window (page 63).

• If you press the [INTRO]

button while the ending is

playing, the Intro section

will begin playing after the

ending is ﬁnished.

• When the [AUTO FILLIN]

button is set to on and you

press a MAIN button while

the ending is playing, ﬁll-in

accompaniment will

immediately start playing,

continuing with the Main

section.

• You can begin the accom-

paniment by using the

Ending instead of the Intro

section. In this case, the

auto accompaniment

doesn’t stop when the

ending is ﬁnished.

• If you select a different

style while the style is not

playing, the “default”

tempo for that style is also

selected. If the style is

playing, the same tempo

is maintained even if you

select a different style.

• When STOP ACMP is set

to on and the accompani-

ment is not playing, you

can play both chords and

bass in the Auto Accom-

paniment area in the key-

board (page 122).

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

This switches to the ending section. When the ending is ﬁnished, the Style stops

automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back.

Auto Accompaniment area

Split point

END

Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on.

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when

SYNC. STOP is turned on.

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.

You can also use the SYNC.

STOP function by pressing

the auto accompaniment

area/left-hand range brieﬂy

(page 122).

The style stops when you release your left hand from the keys.

Playing a chord with your left

hand automatically restarts the

style.

Press the [SYNC. STOP]/

[SYNC. START] button

again to stop the style.

Synchro Stop cannot be set

to on when the ﬁngering

mode is set to Full Key-

board/AI Full Keyboard or

the auto accompaniment on

the panel is set to off.

Styles

PSR-A1000

Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when

changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In

Select a Intro

Select a Ending

Play the style using

the Intro or Ending

section (page 30, 31).

To call up the [MAIN] dis-

play, ﬁrst press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button, then press

the [EXIT] button.

Fill

A short phrase used to add

variation to the style.

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play

(page 30, 31).

Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main

sections.

You can also add a ﬁll-in by

pressing the selected MAIN

button again.

To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again.

You can temporarily disable

Auto Fill In during a perfor-

mance by pressing the next

Main section’s button twice

quickly.

END

PSR-A1000

The Multi Pads

The PSR-A1000 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that

can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.

Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display (page 35).

Press any of the Multi Pads.

The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as

soon as the pad is pressed.

The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the

phrase :

• To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button.

• To stop speciﬁc pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the

pad or pads you wish to stop.

Turn ACMP on (page 57).

Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads.

In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back.

Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back.

Multi Pads

Playing the Multi Pads

• Simply tap any of the Multi

Pads at any time to play

back the corresponding

phrase at the currently set

tempo.

• You can even play two,

three, or four Multi Pads at

the same time.

• Pressing the pad during

its playback will stop play-

ing and begin playing from

the top again.

MULTI PAD

STOP

Chord Match

MULTI PAD

STOP

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

area

The Chord Match on/off sta-

tus depends on the selected

Multi Pad Bank.

The Multi Pad

PSR-A1000

This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another.

Multi Pad Edit

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the desired Multi Pad(s).

The same as the Open/Save

display on pages 38 and 41.

Calls up the upper

level directory page.

Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 35)

PSR-A1000

Song Playback

Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve

recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 83), and commercially available song data. You can use this

highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song. You can also

display the lyrics in the LCD.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General

MIDI).

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG

format. XG is a signiﬁcant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard,

providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect

sections and effect types.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC

(Disk Orchestra Collection) format.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s

original MIDI ﬁle format.

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

Compatible Song Types

Commercially available

music data is subject to

intended only for your own

personal use.

For more information on the

song ﬁle types compatible

with the PSR-A1000, see

page 143.

Song Playback

PSR-A1000

Playing the Internal Songs

Song Playback

BACK NEXT

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

END

2-2 Open a folder and

select a song to be

played back.

2-1 Select the PRESET tab with the

[BACK] button.

You can enable the Synchro

Start for the song by simul-

taneously pressing the

[TOP] button and the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton. The song starts as

soon as you play the key-

board. You can also use this

function along with the

Style’s Synchro Start func-

tion (page 57).

You can have the volume

automatically fade in and

fade out at the beginning

and end of the song. Simply

press the [FADEIN/OUT]

button at the start of song

playback to fade in the song,

and press it again at the end

of the song to fade out.

Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons

(page 47) or the [TAP TEMPO] button.

You can even change the playback speed by tapping out

the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice.

The song starts.

To stop the song immediately, press the

button again.

Press the button in order to go back to the

previous screen.

START/STOP

EXIT

If the MAIN screen (at left) is

not displayed, press the

[DIRECT ACCESS] button

followed by the [EXIT] button.

You can also make a variety

of other settings (such as

tempo, voice selection, etc.)

and have them automati-

cally called up when you

play back the song

(page 95).

Songs can also be played

back continuously. Set

SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON

from the SONG SETTING

display (page 121).

Make sure that the Language

setting for the instrument

(page 135) is the same as that

of the ﬁle name of the song

that you are playing back.

Song Playback

PSR-A1000

Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style

When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 -

16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you

to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts

of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of

the song’s chord data.

• [ACMP] button .................. ...ON

• [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON

Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.

Select the desired accompaniment style.

Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE

section buttons.)

Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections.

The style automatically stops when the song ﬁnishes or is stopped.

The accompaniment stops

when you stop the song. If

the accompaniment style is

playing and you start the

song, the accompaniment

automatically stops. How-

ever, for internal songs that

use accompaniment styles,

the accompaniment style is

not stopped.

END

Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the

accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback.

Song Playback

PSR-A1000

Playing Back Songs on Disk

Insert the disk into the drive.

The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions

(page 67), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display.

Other Playback-related Operations

■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward

■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Speciﬁc Channels

CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel

by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the

appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press

that channel’s button again.

Before proceeding, make

sure to read the section

“Handling the Floppy Disk

Drive (FDD) and Floppy

Disk” (page 7).

You can set whether or not

the PSR-A1000 automati-

cally calls up the ﬁrst disk

song when a disk is inserted

(page 134).

Some song data for the

PSR-A1000 has been

recorded with special “free

tempo” settings. During play-

back of such song data, the

measure numbers shown in

the display will not corre-

spond to the actual measure;

this only serves as a refer-

ence as to how much of the

song has been played back.

Songs containing a large

amount of data may not be

able to be read properly by

the instrument, and as such

you may not be able to

select them. The maximum

capacity is about 200–

300KB, however this may

differ depending on the data

contents of each song.

Insert the disk shutter side

ﬁrst and label face up.

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again

from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped,

pressing this button returns the song to the beginning.

Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see

below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button.

When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the

beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.

When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the

[REW] and [FF] buttons.

Phrase Mark

This data speciﬁes a certain

location in the song data.

SONG POSITION display

“PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the

[J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW]

and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark.

BALANCE

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 58).

Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below).

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

in the song data. The chan-

nels are assigned as shown

below for the PSR-A1000.

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Song Playback

PSR-A1000

This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you

want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play

that part yourself.

This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly.

Muting Speciﬁc Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks

SONG

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

METRO-

NOMEREPEAT

Use this button to turn on/off

the right-hand part.

Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part.

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

Select the song to be played back (page 66).

Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts

(all but the right hand/left hand).

Start the song.

Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 47).

All tracks are automatically

set to on when selecting a

different song.

To stop the song, press the

button again.

START/STOP

END

You can change the channel

assignments for Track 1 and

Track 2 (page 121), letting

you specify which parts are

muted when pressing the

[TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/

[EXTRA TRACKS] buttons.

Repeat Playback of a Speciﬁc Range

SONG

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

METRO-

NOMEREPEAT

START/STOP

Play back the song (page 67, 69).

You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by

pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired

end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again.

Stop the song.

To cancel the Repeat function, press the

button again.

REPEAT

Press this button at the point you want

the repeating phrase to start (Point A).

Press this button at the point you want

the repeating phrase to end (Point B).

After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from

point A to point B is played back repeatedly.

Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP]

button returns to point A.

Point B cannot be selected

unless Point A has been

selected ﬁrst.

Specifying only Point A

results in repeat playback

between Point A and the

end of the song.

The speciﬁed A and B

points will be erased when

selecting a different song

number, cancelling the

Repeat function, or select-

ing a different repeat mode

— such as Phrase Repeat

or repeat in Song Chain

Play (page 118).

END

Song Playback

PSR-A1000

This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your

performance or song playback.

Displaying the Lyrics

Select the

desired song

(page 67, 69).

The lyrics are

in reverse

display along

with song

playback.

Stop the song.

To return to the previous page, press the

button.

EXIT

END

The lyrics can be changed

(page 98).

Start the song.

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

If the selected song does

not contain lyric data, lyrics

are not displayed.

In this example, select

“Lyrics” in the Function

folder of the PRESET

(SONG) page.

If the selected song

contains chord data, chord

names are displayed with

the lyrics.

PSR-A1000

Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale

Tuning/Scale Memory

The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily raise or lower the pitches of speciﬁc notes and create your own

scales. You can change the scale settings at any time — even when you are playing. Up to six scale settings can be

stored for instant recall, whenever you need them.

The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B).

You can easily change the scale setting at any time by pressing one of the [SCALE

SETTING] buttons, located at the left side of the panel.

Pressing each button turns the Scale Setting feature for the speciﬁc note on and off.

The Scale Setting feature affects all the notes having the same note name in all

octaves. When set to on (the selected button itself is lit), you can play the keyboard

in the selected oriental scale.

The scale setting for each note is -50 cents. You can also adjust the scale tuning in

1-cent units in the SCALE TUNE display.

You can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by ﬁne tuning the scale

notes.

Press the [SCALE TUNING] button located at the right side of display to call up the SCALE TUNE display.

Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting

The [SCALE SETTING] buttons

will light or go out according to

the song playback data.

The Scale Setting function has

no effect on the Drum Kit/SFX

Kit voices.

Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Selects the

desired scale

template. BAYAT

and RAST are

two typical

oriental scale

settings.

Determines the base

note for each scale.

When the base note is

changed, the pitch of

the keyboard is

transposed, yet

maintains the original

pitch relationship

between the notes.

Adjusts the scale tuning of

the selected note.

▲/▼] : in 50-cent steps

[5▲/▼] : in 1-cent steps

(–64 through

+63)

Press the 4 or 5 [▲/▼]

buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to

the factory setting.

The [SCALE SETTING]

buttons will light when the

tuning values of the

corresponding notes are set to

something other than “0”. Also,

the values you set by using the

[SCALE SETTING] buttons are

automatically reﬂected in the

SCALE TUNE display.

Selects which parts should

be affected by the scale

setting. Select the part to be

set by pressing 6 or 7 [▲/▼]

and set the function ON or

OFF by pressing [8▲/▼].

Cent

A unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of

a semitone (100 cents = 1

semitone).

You can register your original

scale tunings to a REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY button. To do

this, checkmark “SCALE” in the

REGISTRATION MEMORY

display (page 76).

Selects the note

to be tuned.

When you adjust the scale tuning, the scale template name

shown at the top of the display will change to “EDITED

SCALE” indicating some adjustment has been done from the

preset scale template.

Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory

PSR-A1000

Scale

■ Equal Temperament

The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This

is the most commonly used tuning in music today.

■ Bayat/Rast

Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

■ Pure Major/Pure Minor

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, ﬁfth).

You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing.

■ Pythagorean

This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect ﬁfths, which are

collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and

suitable for some leads.

■ Mean-Tone

This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in

tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.

■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on

the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character.

The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when

performing period music on the harpsichord.

Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C)

The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument.





EFF





Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Bayat 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0

Rast 0.0 00.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0

Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2

Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2

Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8

Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7

Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory

PSR-A1000

The scale settings you set (using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display) are memorized by the

Scale Memory function. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them.

The scale settings memorized to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons are saved as a single ﬁle.

Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory

Set up the scale settings as desired using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display.

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons.

The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. Any data that was previously in the selected location

is erased and replaced by the new settings.

The memorized scale settings here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation (see next section).

Saving Your Scale Settings

BANK 01

All settings memorized to the buttons

[1]–[6] are referred to as a “bank.” The

banks can be saved to “USER” or

“FLOPPY DISK” as Scale Tune Bank

ﬁles.

Press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button and [EXIT]

button to call up the MAIN

display.

Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory

PSR-A1000

To recall the memorized scale settings, select the desired bank in the SCALE TUNE BANK

display (page 72). Press the appropriate SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] button to which you

memorized the setting. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light.

The Scale Memory function can be turned off by pressing the SCALE MEMORY button

which is currently lit, so that the light goes out. The default Equal Temperament Scale

settings (pitch settings for all notes are “0” will be restored.

SCALE TUNE EDIT display

The contents of the current Scale Tune Bank are listed in the SCALE TUNE EDIT screen. The names of the stored Scale

Settings are shown in the display.

From this screen, you can select, name, or delete each of the Scale Settings.

Select..... Press the [A]–[C]/[F]–[H] buttons. The SCALE TUNE EDIT display is linked to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6]

buttons. When you select the Scale Settings in the display, the corresponding SCALE MEMORY button

lights.

Name .... This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 38) in “Basic Operations —

Organizing Your Data.”

Delete.... This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 40) in “Basic Operations — Organizing

Your Data.”

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Save the settings you’ve made to the SCALE MEMORY buttons as a single

Scale Tune Bank ﬁle (page 41).

The SCALE TUNE

EDIT display appears.

For details on this

display, see below.

The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the SCALE TUNE BANK

display by pressing the [8] (▲) button and save the data (page 41).

Recalling the Scale Setting

If you press a SCALE

MEMORY button to which

nothing is memorized, the

current scale settings remain

and nothing changes.

PSR-A1000

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR-A1000 just as you want — selecting speciﬁc

voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those

settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button.

This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the

settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you.

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory

END

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Set up the panel controls as desired.

For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List

(Parameter Chart).

Select the desired parameter groups

for the settings you want to register.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY]

dial to navigate in this display. To

the corresponding box. Groups left

without checkmarks will not be included

in the Registration Memory setting.

This allows you to maintain certain

settings, even when switching among

Registration Memory presets. You can

also use the Freeze function (page 78)

to override the Registration Memory

changes — letting you prevent certain

panel settings from being changed.

Enters a checkmark to the

selected box. You can also

use the [ENTER] button.

Removes the checkmark from

the selected box. You can also

use the [ENTER] button.

Cancels the registration

and returns to the MAIN

display. You can also use

the [EXIT] button.

Press the desired

number button for

registering the settings.

Any data that was previ-

ously registered to the

selected REGISTRATION

MEMORY button (indica-

tor is green or red) will be

erased and replaced by

the new settings.

Indicator is green .....The panel setting is registered, but not selected.

Indicator is red.........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected.

Indicator is off..........The panel setting is not registered.

Keep in mind that songs or

styles on disk cannot

registered to Registration

Memory. If you want to

or style, copy the relevant

data to “USER” in the

SONG/STYLE display

(page 35) and register the

data separately.

The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the

Save operation explained on the next page.

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

PSR-A1000

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups

The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single ﬁle.

REGISTRATION EDIT display

The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The

names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant

REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green.

From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets.

Select ..........Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8]

buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on

(indicator is red).

Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 38) in “Basic Operations —

Organizing Your Data.”

Delete .........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 40) in “Basic Operations —

Organizing Your Data.”

Keep in mind that the size of

the Registration bank ﬁles

and the memory space they

occupy depends on the

amount of functions set in

each.

BANK 01

All settings registered to buttons [1]-

[8] are referred to as a “bank.” The

banks can be saved to “USER” or

“FLOPPY DISK” as Registration

bank ﬁles.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button and [EXIT]

button to call up the MAIN

display.

Save the settings you’ve

made to the

Registration Memory

buttons as a single

Registration bank ﬁle

(page 41).

The REGISTRATION EDIT display

appears. For details on this display,

see below.

The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION

BANK display by pressing the [8▼] (UP) button and save the data (page 41).

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

PSR-A1000

You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you speciﬁcally want or need. For example, if you

de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you

change the Registration Memory preset.

Recalling the Registered Settings

Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 77).

Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are

green) to recall the desired settings.

Selecting the Freeze Settings

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup

You can program your

Registration Memory

presets to be called up in

sequence, in any order you

desire. Once programmed,

the presets 1 - 8 can be

selected in sequence with

the [BACK][NEXT] buttons

or the pedal (page 126).

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the Freeze settings.

Enters a checkmark

to the selected box.

Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you speciﬁed in the Freeze

page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.

Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the

desired settings.

Removes the

checkmark from the

selected box.

Call up the “FREEZE”

page from the

REGIST.SEQUENCE/

FREEZE/VOICE SET

screen (page 126).

PSR-A1000

Editing Voices — Sound Creator

The PSR-A1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by

editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can save it

as a USER voice for future recall.

• The Voice can be edited in

realtime while playing

back a song/style.

• Keep in mind that adjust-

ments made to the param-

eters may not make much

change in the actual

sound depending on the

original settings of the

voice.

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL

STUDIO

Operation

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

PART

Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the

Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the

voice you wish to edit.

Indicates the

parameters available

for editing in this

display. These

correspond to the

parameters/values

shown at the bottom

of the display.

Select the desired menu by

pressing the [NEXT]/

[BACK] button.

Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving

the edited voice as a User voice (page 41).

Select the desired menu.

The selected menu is highlighted.

Can be used during editing to compare

the sound of the original voice with the

edited voice.

Save the edited voice to the USER drive

(Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 41).

The voice can also be

selected in the SOUND

CREATOR display.

Press the

[SOUND

CREATOR]

button.

Edit the voice parameters.

The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail starting on page 81.

The settings are lost if the

edited part's voice is

switched to another voice.

Important data should be

saved to User Drive or ﬂoppy

disk.

Press the [USER] button to select the

edited voice, and play the keyboard.

CAUTION

Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-

PSR-A1000

Sound Creator Parameters

The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display.

COMMON

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79.

COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave.

SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice.

EFFECT Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings.

HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings.

Common parameter Other location

MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 55

PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 114

FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 114

FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 114

REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115

CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115

DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 54

DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115

DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 55,115

HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127

HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127

HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127

HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127

HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127

HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127

Keep in mind that there are

certain parameters whose

Sound Creator settings

affect only the Main part’s

voice.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Set the volume of the current edited

voice.

Set the portamento time of each

part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE)

(page 114).

Determines the touch sensitivity, or

how greatly the volume responds to

your playing strength.

0 —– – Produces more dramatic

level drops, the more softly

you play.

—

– Normal response.

127— Produces high volume for

any playing strength (ﬁxed)

Shift the octave range of the

selected voice up or down in

octaves. When the Main or Layer

part’s voice is used, the M/LYR

parameter is available; when the

Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT

parameter is available.

This determines whether the voice

is played monophonically (page 55).

Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-

PSR-A1000

SOUND

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79.

■ FILTER

FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a

certain frequency range.

■ EG

The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce

many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion

sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.

• ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum

level after the key is played. The higher the value, the

slower the attack.

• DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain

level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher

the value, the slower the decay.

• RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after

the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the ﬁlter, EG, and

vibrato settings (see below).

In addition to making the

sound either brighter or

more mellow, Filter can be

used to produce electronic,

synthesizer-like effects.

Cutoff frequency

Volume

Frequency

(pitch)

Cutoff range

These frequencies are

“passed” by the filter.

• BRIGHTNESS

Determines the cutoff frequency or

effective frequency (resonance) range of

the ﬁlter (see diagram). Higher values

result in a brighter sound.

Resonance

• Harmonic Content

Determines the emphasis given to the

cutoff frequency, set in BRIGHTNESS

above (see diagram). Higher values result

in a more pronounced effect.

Resonance

Volume

Frequency

(pitch)

Time

Level

Key on

Key off

ATTACK RELEASE

DECAY

If RELEASE is set to a large

value, the sustain becomes

long.

Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-

PSR-A1000

■ VIBRATO

• DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher

settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato.

• SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).

• DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the

playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see

diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato

onset.

EFFECT

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79.

HARMONY

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79.

The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 128.

VIBRATO

Creates a wavering in the

sound by periodically chang-

ing the pitch.

DEPTH

SPEED

DELAY

Time

Level

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

The same as the “Mixing Console”

on page 115.

Determines the Sustain depth

of each voice when the

[SUSTAIN] button is set to on.

Determines the DSP type.

For information on the effect

structure, see page 117; for a list of

available effect types, refer to the

separate Data List.

PSR-A1000

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs

— Song Creator

With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store

them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 84), which lets you

record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 85), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording

(page 87), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard

performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song can be stored to

internal memory or ﬂoppy disk (page 35, 41).

About Song Recording

■ Quick Recording (page 84)

This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano

song you are practicing. You can select from four parts: right hand, left hand

and auto accompaniment/multi pad. For example, you can record only your

right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right

hand and the auto accompaniment.

■ Multi Recording (page 85)

This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create

the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each

instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can

also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with

your own performance.

■ Step Recording (page 87)

This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note

individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise

recordings, or for recording parts that are difﬁcult to play.

■ Song Editing (page 93)

The PSR-A1000 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick

Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods.

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

DIGITAL RECORDING

• The internal memory capacity of

the PSR-A1000 is about 260KB.

Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD

ﬂoppy disks is about 720KB and

1.44MB, respectively. When you

store data to these locations, all ﬁle

types of the PSR-A1000 (Voice,

Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are

stored together.

• Songs recorded on the PSR-

A1000 are automatically recorded

as SMF (Standard MIDI File format

0) data. For details on SMF, see

page 143.

• Playback of the recorded song

data can be transmitted from MIDI

OUT, letting you play the sounds of

a connected external tone genera-

tor (page 130).

• The volume level of each channel

of the song can be adjusted from

the Mixing Console and the set-

tings can be saved. Moreover, even

after you’ve set a voice for your

keyboard play during recording,

you can record voice selections, so

that the voice changes automati-

cally during playback (page 95).

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so

you can check your progress.

■ Play back your new song

To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by

using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the

song.

You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 96).

Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data

(page 35, 41).

Quick Recording

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

REC

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

■ When creating a new song:

■ When recording over the part of an internal

song or a song on disk with your own

performance:

Select the desired song (page 67, 69).

Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song.

If you want to record to the MAIN/Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [MAIN]/[LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON.

Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well.

Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button

corresponding to the track you want to record.

You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the

same time.

To record your keyboard performance:

Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button.

To record the auto accompaniment and

multi pad performance:

Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.

To stop recording, press

the [REC] button again.

If the "LAYER" or "LEFT" but-

ton is on before pressing the

REC button, the correspond-

ing Layer and Left parts are

automatically recorded to dif-

ferent channels.

The performance of track 1/2

is recorded to the channel

speciﬁed in the SONG SET-

TING display (page 121).

Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE

[START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by

pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop

function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 123).

To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again.

Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song

start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 123).

END

To pause, press the SONG

[START/STOP] button. To

resume recording, press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

You can also use the metro-

nome click as a guide while

recording.

The sound of the metronome

is not recorded.

You can overdub a second

right-hand performance onto

Track 2 after recording the

ﬁrst right-hand performance

(including the layer voices)

on Track 1. To do this, set the

[LEFT] button to OFF and

repeat steps 2 and 3.

Turning off the power

automatically deletes your

recorded performance. If

you wish to save the

recording, make sure to

store it to internal mem-

ory (USER drive) or ﬂoppy

disk (page 35, 41).

CAUTION

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of

a full band or orchestra.

The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below.

About the accompaniment style parts

Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used.

Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others.

Chord........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices.

Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir.

Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.

Channels

Parts

(default settings)

Available parts Channels

Parts

(default settings)

Available parts

1 Voice MAIN

Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT

Multi Pad1

Multi Pad2

Multi Pad3

Multi Pad4

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2

Accompaniment style BASS

Accompaniment style CHORD1

Accompaniment style CHORD2

Accompaniment style PAD

Accompaniment style PHRASE1

Accompaniment style PHRASE2

MIDI

Accompaniment style

RHYTHM 1

Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT

Multi Pad1

Multi Pad2

Multi Pad3

Multi Pad4

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2

Accompaniment style BASS

Accompaniment style CHORD1

Accompaniment style CHORD2

Accompaniment style PAD

Accompaniment style PHRASE1

Accompaniment style PHRASE2

MIDI

2 Voice MAIN 10

Accompaniment style

RHYTHM 2

3 Voice MAIN 11

Accompaniment style

BASS

4 Voice MAIN 12

Accompaniment style

CHORD1

5 Voice MAIN 13

Accompaniment style

CHORD2

6 Voice MAIN 14

Accompaniment style

PA D

7 Voice MAIN 15

Accompaniment style

PHRASE1

8 Voice MAIN 16

Accompaniment style

PHRASE2

Multi Recording

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

REC

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

■ When creating a new song:

■ When recording over the part of an internal

song or a song on disk with your own

performance:

Select the desired song (page 67, 69).

Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously

holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] -

[8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time.

REC......................... Enables recording for the channel

ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel

OFF......................... Mutes the channel

To cancel or disable

recording, press the

[REC] button once

again.

The part is automatically

selected when setting the

several channels to “REC” at

the same time.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded.

This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the

accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the

recording channels

selected in step #2.

For a list of the initial

default assignments,

see page 85.

When selecting the MIDI

part

• Setting a single channel

to MIDI

All incoming data received

via any of the MIDI chan-

nels 1 - 16 is recorded.

When using an external

MIDI keyboard or control-

ler to record, this lets you

record without having to

set the MIDI transmit

channel on the external

device.

• Setting several channels

to MIDI

When using an external

MIDI keyboard or control-

ler to record, this records

data only over the set

MIDI channel — meaning

the external device must

also be set to the same

channel.

A single part (with the

exception of MIDI parts) can-

not be assigned to several

channels.

Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the

SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The

recording can be started/stopped by pressing the

foot pedal if the recording punch in/out function is

set to the pedal (page 92).

To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.

You can also use the foot pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the

recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 92).

To pause, press the SONG

[START/STOP] button. To

resume recording, press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

You can also use the metro-

nome click as a guide while

recording.

The sound of the metronome

is not recorded.

Play back your new song.

To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the

beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP]

button.

Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the

beginning of the song.

To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above.

You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them

while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a

ﬁnished song.

You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16)

displays (page 96).

Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store

the recorded data (page 35, 41).

END

Turning off the power

automatically deletes your

recorded performance. If

you wish to save the

recording, make sure to

store it to internal mem-

ory (USER drive) or ﬂoppy

disk (page 35, 41).

The settings of the recorded

parts is stored temporarily

until you execute Quick

Recording, select a song, or

turn the power off.

CAUTION

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is

also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately.

Operation

Recording Individual Notes — Step Record

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

PART

Select an existing song (page 67, 69) to which

you want to add parts or re-record. If you want

to create a new song, simultaneously press the

[RECORD] button and the [TOP] button.

Press the [A] button to call up the Song

Creator display.

Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.

Using the [BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons, select the “1 -16”

tab for recording melodies

and other parts, or select

the “CHD” (Chord) tab for

recording chords, and after

selecting the “1 - 16” tab,

select a record channel

with the [F] (CH) button.

BACK NEXT

Call up the Step Record

display by pressing the

[G] button.

Any voice, effect and other

settings you make in the

Mixing Console are automat-

ically cancelled when you

call up the CHD (Chord)

page.

The voices in the USER and

FLOPPY DISK pages can-

not be selected for Step

recording. You can select

voices from the PRESET

page; however, these may

sound slightly different from

the original voice.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

■ Measure/Beat/Clock

■ Velocity

The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values.

■ Gate Time

The following settings are available:

Normal ....................... 80%

Tenuto ........................ 99%

Staccato...................... 40%

Staccatissimo.............. 20%

Manual

....................... The gate time (note length) can be speciﬁed as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Kbd. Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp

Actual

playing

strength

127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Moves the cursor position

up and down.

Returns the cursor to the

beginning of the song (the

ﬁrst note of the ﬁrst

measure).

Determines the velocity

(loudness) of the note to be

entered (only when recording

the melody). For information

on velocity settings, see below.

Determines the length of the

note (as a percentage) from

the position at which it is to be

entered. (This is available only

when recording the melody.)

For information on gate time

settings, see below.

Each press of this button toggles

among the three basic note

selectors at the bottom of the

display: normal, dotted, and triplet.

(This is available only when

recording the melody.)

Deletes the event at the cursor.

Use these to move the

selected event, in units of

measures (BAR), beat, and

clocks. For information on

measure/beat/clock settings,

see below.

Speciﬁes the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth

notes are available only when recording the melody.)

This also determines the position to which the pointer

will advance after a note has been entered.

First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, ﬁrst specify the length and loudness in this display,

then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard.

To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded

data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 41).

END

Measure

Beat

Clock

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note)

In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording

by guiding you through this actual music example,

shown at right.

The operations here apply to step 6 on page 88.

■ Play back the newly created melody

Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button

to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be

edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 96).

1-1 Select this note.

1-3 ...press this (to input a tie).

1-2 While holding down this note...

2-2

2-3

2-4

2-1 Select this note.

3-1 Press this button to

display the dotted notes.

3-2 Select this note.

3-3

4-1 Call up the normal notes

by pressing this button.

4-3

4-2 Select this note.

To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note.

▲

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step

Record (Chord)

The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with

precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord

changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion.

The operations here apply to step 6 on page 88.

Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step)

For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below.

C F G F G7 C

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

Enter the chords by using the currently

selected chord ﬁngering method in the Auto

Accompaniment area of the keyboard.

Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right.

C F G

MAIN A

MAIN

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

001:1:000

001:3:000

002:1:000

C F G F G7

MAIN A BREAK

INTROBREAK

002:3:000

002:4:000

Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right.

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

■ Play back the newly created chord progression

Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the

SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the

recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG

CREATOR (CHD) display (page 97). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the

SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data.

Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right.

C F G F G7 C

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

MAIN

003:1:000

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

To enter a ﬁll-in, press the

[AUTO FILL IN] button and

press one of the MAIN [A]–

[D] buttons.

END Mark

An “END” mark is shown in

the display, indicating the

end of the song data.

The actual position of the

End mark differs depending

on the section that is input at

the end of the song. When

an Ending section is input,

the End mark automatically

follows the Ending data.

When a section other than

Ending is input, the End

mark is set two measures

after the ﬁnal section.

The End mark can be freely

set to any position desired.

▲

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording.

To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation

steps 1 - 3 on page 87.

About Punch In/Out

This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a speciﬁc section of an already recorded channel. The

illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,

Punching In/Out — Rec Mode

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the measure at which Punch

In overwrite recording starts (when

“PUNCH IN AT” is selected).

These settings determine how recording will

start.

Normal

Pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button

enables Synchro standby and overwrite

recording starts as soon as you start playing

the keyboard.

First Key On

Overwrite recording starts as soon as you

start playing the keyboard. This setting also

preserves the previous lead-in data, letting

you record over the original lead-in without

erasing it.

Punch In At

The song plays back normally up to the

indicated Punch In measure (set by the

[3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite

recording at that Punch In measure.

These settings determine how recording will stop as well

as what happens to previously recorded data.

Determines the Punch Out

measure — the measure at

which Punch In overwrite

recording stops (when

“PUNCH OUT AT” is

selected).

When this is set to ON, you

can use the foot pedal 2 to

control the punch-in and

punch-out points. (The current

function assignment of the

foot pedal is cancelled.) Press

and hold down the foot pedal

to record. Recording stops

when you release the pedal.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save the

edited data.

Replace All

This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped.

Punch Out

This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped.

Punch Out At

Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons),

then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally.

12345678

REC START setting

REC END setting

12345

Deleted

Start/start overwrite recording

Original data

Previously recorded data

Newly recorded data

Deleted data

NORMAL

REPLACE ALL

12345678

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT

12345678

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT AT=006

12345

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording

FIRST KEY ON

REPLACE ALL

12345678

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT

12345678

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT AT=006

12345

PUNCH IN AT=003

REPLACE ALL

12345678

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT

12345 7

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT AT=006

*1 When measures 1 - 2 are not

overwritten, recording starts

from measure 3.

*2 You’ll have to press the [REC]

button at the end of 5 measures.

Start/start overwrite recording

Stop recording

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing

features to change the song data.

Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel

Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons.

Quantize

Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following

musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.

Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead

of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to

the speciﬁed note value (see below).

■ About Quantize Size

Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the

data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4

note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.

Editing a Recorded Song

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use this to select the

desired edit operation.

Selects the desired channel

to be quantized.

Selects the quantize size (resolution).

See the below for the details.

Determines how strongly the

notes will be quantized. If a

value less than 100% is

selected, notes will be

moved toward the speciﬁed

quantization beats only by

the speciﬁed amount.

Applying less than 100%

quantization lets you

preserve some of the

“human” feel in the

recording.

Executes the Quantize

operation. After the

operation is completed, this

button changes to [UNDO],

letting you restore the

original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Quantize

results. The Undo function

only has one level; only the

previous operation can be

undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization

1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note +

1/8 note triplet *

1/4 note

1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note +

1/8 note triplet *

1/16 note +

1/16 note triplet *

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different

note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes

and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to

straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting,

both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

Quantize Size

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Delete

This lets you delete recorded data in the speciﬁed channel.

Mix

This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the

data from one channel to another.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Deletes all data in the

selected channel. After the

operation is completed, this

button changes to [UNDO],

letting you restore the

original data. The Undo

function only has one level;

only the previous operation

can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

These select the channel

to be deleted.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Executes the Mix operation.

After the operation is

completed, this button

changes to [UNDO], letting

you restore the original data

if you’re not satisﬁed with

the Mix results. The Undo

function only has one level;

only the previous operation

can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

These let you specify the two

source channels to be mixed.

If “COPY” is selected here, the data

from Source 1 is copied to the

Destination channel.

Determines the channel into which the

mix or copy results will be placed.

All data other than the mixed

note data is derived from the

Source 1 channel.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Channel Transpose

This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in

semitone increments.

Set Up

You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing

console or panel controls.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Executes the Channel

Transpose operation. After

the operation is completed,

this button changes to

[UNDO], letting you restore

the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Channel

Transpose results. The

Undo function only has one

level; only the previous

operation can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel.

Toggles between the two

channel displays: Channels

1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16.

To simultaneously set all

channels to the same value,

adjust the Channel

Transpose for one of the

channels while holding

down this button.

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Executes the SET

UP operation. Once

SET UP has been

executed, the

operation cannot be

cancelled or undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception

of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song.

Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the

[TOP] button, and stop playback.

Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console.

Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song.

Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played

part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE)

button.

Use this to checkmark the

selected item.

Checkmarked items are

stored with the song.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Editing Note Events — 1 - 16

From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on

page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.

Note Events

Parameter Description

Note Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note.

Ctrl (Control change)

Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate

Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

Prog (Program change)

Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to

the separate Data List booklet (Voice List).

P.Bnd (Pitch bend) Determines the pitch bend value.

A.T. (After touch) Determines the after touch value.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to move the

cursor up/down and select

the desired event.

Determines the channel to

be edited.

For coarse adjustment of the event value.

Calls up the Step Recording

display (page 88).

Calls up the Filter display

(page 98), letting you select

only the events you wish to

shown in the Event List.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

Holding this button down

while using the [A] and [B]

buttons lets you select

multiple events.

For ﬁne adjustment of the event value.

Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events

are copied and can be pasted to another location.

Adds a new event to the Event List.

Copies all selected events. The

copied events can be pasted to

another location.

Deletes the

event at the

cursor position.

Pastes all cut or copied events to

the selected location.

If the value at the cursor has been

changed, pressing this restores the

original value.

Determines the current

position of the event being

edited.

Returns to the beginning

position of the current song

(the ﬁrst note of the ﬁrst

measure).

Use these to move the

cursor left/right and select

the desired parameter of

the highlighted event. Keep

in mind that moving the

cursor away from the just-

edited value automatically

enters that value.

To actually enter an edited

value, move the cursor away

from the value or press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton.

The sound of the voices

recorded with Step recording

may sound slightly different

from the original.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Editing Chord Events — CHD

From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song.

Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.

With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events

(page 96).

Chord Events

Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)

From this display, you can edit recorded System events.

Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The

operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 96).

System Events

Parameter Description

Style (Accompaniment

style)

Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select

the desired style.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Chord Speciﬁes the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note.

Sect (Section) Speciﬁes the section — its name and variation.

OnOff (Channel on/off) Determines whether speciﬁc channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off.

CH.Vol (Channel volume) Determines the level of speciﬁc channels (rhythm, bass, etc.).

S.Vol (Style volume) Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style.

Parameter Description

ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display. Only

one value can be speciﬁed at the beginning of the song data.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature.

Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting.

XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the

separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;

however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;

however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Press this to convert the

recorded chord and section

entries into song data.

To actually enter an edited

value, move the cursor away

from the value or press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-A1000

Inputting and Editing Lyrics

This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct

already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to

step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as

those in Editing Note Events (page 96).

In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”

Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on pages 67 and 71.

Lyrics Events

Customizing the Event List — Filter

This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for

display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To ﬁlter out an event so that it is not shown on the list,

remove the checkmark so that the box is empty.

To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or

LYRICS (page 96 - page 98).

Parameter Description

Name (Song name) Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name.

Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.

Code (Other controls) CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Move the cursor

to the event

containing the

lyric “star.”

Use these buttons to call up

the Lyric display, from

which you can input lyrics.

From the Lyric display

(page 42), enter the new

word, “(your name).”

Press this button

to save the newly

changed lyric

data.

Move the cursor to

the word “star.”

To actually enter an edited

value, move the cursor away

from the value or press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

EXIT

Calls up the Main Filter

display. For more

information on each event

type, refer to the separate

Data List booklet (MIDI

Data Format).

Enters checkmarks for all

items.

Reverses the checkmark

settings for all boxes. In

other words, this enters

checkmarks to all boxes that

were previously un-checked

and vice versa.

Calls up the Control

Change Filter display. For

more information on each

event type, refer to the

separate Data List booklet

(MIDI Data Format).

Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display.

For more information on each event type,

refer to the separate Data List booklet

(MIDI Data Format).

When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the

item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER”

is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time.

Selects the item, scrolling up/

down one item at a time.

Enters/removes the checkmark

for the selected item.

Selects only note data;

checkmarks for all other

boxes are removed.

END

Execute the settings by

pressing the [EXIT] button.

PSR-A1000

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just

as with the preset styles.

About Creating Accompaniment Styles

The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section

of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to

the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create.

■ Realtime Recording (page 101)

You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the

keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself

— you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the

style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your

own custom style.

Realtime Recording Characteristics

• Loop recording

Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can

also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two

measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you

record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded.

• Overdub recording

This feature lets you record new material to a track already containing recorded data, without deleting the original

data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you speciﬁcally delete it yourself. For example, if

you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record notes to each

pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new material while

hearing the previous parts.

■ Step Recording (page 102)

This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows

you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is

ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are

difﬁcult to play.

■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 103)

This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining

various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For

example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you

could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass

pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8

Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one

accompaniment style.

■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 104)

With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve

created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles.

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

FADE

IN/OUT

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

DIGITAL RECORDING

Section Channel

INTRO A - D

RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,

BASS, CHORD 1,

CHORD 2, PAD,

PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2

MAIN A - D

FILL IN A - D

BREAK

ENDING A - D

For information on the part

structure of accompaniment

styles, see page 85.

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

8Beat 1

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

8Beat 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

60’s 8 Beat

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-A1000

100

Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of

Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into

a single uniﬁed format. By using the edit

functions, you can take full advantage of the

SFF format and freely create your own styles.

The chart at right indicates the process by

which the accompaniment is played back.

(This does not apply to the rhythm tracks.)The

basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the

original style data. This source pattern is

recorded using accompaniment style

recording (see below).

As shown in the chart at right, the actual

output of the accompaniment is determined by

various parameter settings and chord changes

(played in Auto Accompaniment area of the

keyboard) entered to this source pattern.

Source Pattern

1 Source Root (root note of basic chord)

2 Source Chord (type of basic chord)

Pitch Conversion

3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

4 NTT (Note Transposition Table)

Other Settings

5 High Key (threshold of the pitch

conversion)

6 Note Limit (soundable range)

7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of

the chord change)

Output

These are the patterns

recorded to the

accompaniment styles

(page 107).

This data is created by

chords played in the

Auto Accompaniment

area of the keyboard

(page 59).

These settings are

edited from the

PARAMETER display.

These parameters

determine how the

pitch of the source

pattern is converted

when you play chords

in the Auto

Accompaniment area

of the keyboard.

Chord changes (in Auto Accompa-

niment area of the keyboard)

Operation

BACK NEXT

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

PART

Select the desired accompaniment style

for editing. To record a new

accompaniment style from scratch, call

up the BASIC page in the Style Creator

display and select “New Style” by

pressing the [C] button.

Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the

operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting

on the next page.

Use the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons to

select the various

pages.

Press the [EXIT]

button to close

the STYLE

CREATOR

display.

END

Call up the Style display

by pressing the [I]

(SAVE) button (in

Assembly page: [J]

button), then save the

recorded / edited data

to the USER or FLOPPY

DISK page.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

101

PSR-A1000

You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based

on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100.

Realtime Recording — Basic

END

REC .... Channel is enabled for recording.

ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback.

OFF .... Channel is muted.

Selects an empty style,

allowing you to create a

new style from scratch.

Calls up the display for changing the

tempo or beat (time signature).

When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over

channels containing data. To delete data from a speciﬁc

channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press

the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button.

Available only when the channel is set to

[RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete

speciﬁc percussion sounds during

recording. Simultaneously hold down this

button and press the key corresponding to

the instrument you want to delete.

First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/

STOP] button.

The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern

loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while

listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the

percussion instruments assigned to the keys.

Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again.

With the REC CHANNEL

display shown, close the

display by pressing the

[EXIT] button.

If you’ve enabled Sync Start

(by pressing the SYNC.

START button), you can

start recording by simply

pressing a key on the key-

board.

Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and

pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button.

Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data

of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC page”

on page 102) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC

CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.

• Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can

be selected for the RHY 2

channel.

• For the non-rhythm chan-

nels (BASS - PHR 2), all-

voices with the exception

of the Drum Kit/SFX Kit

can be selected.

To release or cancel the

selection, press the [1▼] -

[8▼] button corresponding

to the channel you wish to

cancel. As long as you

continue to hold down the

[J] button, you can toggle

between deleting and

restoring the selected data.

Releasing the [J] button

permanently deletes the

data. Before recording to

one of the non-rhythm

channels (BASS - PHR 2),

make sure to delete the

existing data of the

appropriate channel.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-A1000

102

With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to

perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100.

The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 87), with the exception of the points

described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs

(page 96).

•

In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating

accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically ﬁxed according to the

selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark

position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen.

• When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event

data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change,

etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.).

Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 100) beforehand.

Other Parameters in the Basic Display

[I] (SAVE) button

Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data.

[3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons

Determines the section to be recorded.

[5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons

Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill

In/Break section is ﬁxed at a length of one measure.

[D] (Execute) button

Executes the Pattern Length change.

Recording — Precautions

• The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord.

All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source

chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of

CM7), keep the following points in mind:

* When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the

recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get

optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)

* When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that

you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work,

providing you use them as short passing tones.)

The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the

section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 107.

• When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord

progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to

“HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINOR” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that

would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment

pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts.

You can also select the

desired section for recording

by pressing appropriate

panel button. Pressing one

of the Section buttons calls

up the SECTION display,

from which you can change

sections by using the [6▲▼]/

[7▲▼] buttons. To actually

enter the change, press the

[8▲] button.To select the Fill

In section, press the [AUTO

FILL IN] button.

CRC CRC

C = chord note

C, R = recommended note

Step Recording

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

103

PSR-A1000

This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns —

from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step

4 on page 100.

Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Selects the style section and

channel that will be copied to

the corresponding channels,

selected with the [A]-[D] and

[F]-[I] buttons above.

Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can

assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and

channel that will be copied are playing.

SOLO ............Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM

channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display

(page 102) are played back simultaneously.

ON ................Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set

to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 101)

are played back simultaneously.

OFF ...............If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC

CHANNEL display (page 101), OFF does not

appear and is not available.

These let you select the accompaniment style that

will be used for each channel of your original

style. Select the desired channel by pressing the

[A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same

button to call up the Style screen, from which you

can select the accompaniment style.

After repeating steps 1 and 2

as desired, press the [J] (SAVE)

button to save the assembled

style data. From here, you can

store the settings of all

channels (RHYTHM 1,

RHYTHM 2, BASS, etc.) to a

single accompaniment style.

If you change the section

and channel in steps #1 and

#2, the currently speciﬁed

section and channel are also

changed. The channels

being recorded are also

changed and recording is

stopped automatically.

The PLAY TYPE parameter

affects only the playback,

and does not change the

actual accompaniment style

data.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-A1000

104

Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics

These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment

style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100.

■ Groove

Groove parameters

Original Beat Speciﬁes the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is

applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (speciﬁed in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For

example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are

shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12

Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above.

For example, if the speciﬁed ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th,

6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of

swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced.

Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to

be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine

which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the speciﬁed beat —but not including the ﬁrst beat — will be played early

or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B”

types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Calls up the Style display and

lets you store the edited

accompaniment style data.

Executes the Groove operation. After

the operation is completed, this button

changes to [UNDO], letting you

restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Groove results. The

Undo function only has one level; only

the previous operation can be undone.

Determines the settings for each of the

Groove parameters (see the list below).

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

105

PSR-A1000

■ Dynamics

Dynamics parameters

Accent Type Selects the type of accent.

Strength

Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The

higher the value, the stronger the effect.

Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity

value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower

than 100% compress it.

Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above

100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Calls up the Style display

and lets you store the

edited accompaniment

style data.

Executes the Dynamics operation. After the

operation is completed, this button changes

to [UNDO], letting you restore the original

data if you’re not satisﬁed with the

Dynamics results. The Undo function only

has one level; only the previous operation

can be undone.

Determines the settings for each of the

Dynamics parameters (see the list

below).

Select the desired channel to which

Dynamics is to be applied.

Velocity is determined by

how strongly you play the

keyboard.

The more strongly you play

the keyboard, the higher the

velocity value and, hence,

the louder the sound.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-A1000

106

Editing the Channel Data

In this display, there are ﬁve different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded

accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100.

■ Quantize

Refer to page 93.

■ Velocity Change

Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the speciﬁed channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL)

buttons), according to the speciﬁed percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons).

■ Bar Copy

This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the

speciﬁed channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the ﬁrst and last measures in the

region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the ﬁrst measure of the destination location, to which

the data is to be copied.

■ Bar Clear

This function clears all data from the speciﬁed range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP)

and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the ﬁrst and last measures in the region to be cleared.

■ Remove Event

This function lets you remove speciﬁc events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons

to select the desired event type to be removed.

See the explanations below.

Preset channel BASS-

PHRASE 2 can not be

edited.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

107

PSR-A1000

Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter

This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style

change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the

parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 100. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 100.

■ Source Root/Chord

These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default

setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data

is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you

change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also

change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 102.

■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table)

• NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available.

Root Trans (Root Transpose)

When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3,

E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that

contain melody lines.

Root Fixed

The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key

of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.

When NTR is set to “Root

Fixed” and NTT is set to

“Bypass,” the “Source

Root” and “Source Chord”

parameters are changed to

“Play Root” and “Play

Chord,” respectively. In this

case, you can change

chords and hear the result-

ing sound for all channels.

See the explanations below.

CRC CR CRC C RC CRC C CR CRC C CR

CCC CR

CCC C CR CCC C RC

CRC

RCR

CR CR

CR CCR

CCR

RRCCC

CC RC

CR CC

CR C CR

CC RC C

CCR

CR R RC

CCR

CCC

CRC

CCC C

CRC CR

CRC CC

CCC

CCCR

RCC

CCC

RCC

CRC CRR

CRC

RCC

CR CC CCR CR

CMaj

CM7

Caug Cm6

Cm7



5Cm7

Cm7

CmM7 CmM7

Cdim

Cdim7



Csus4

Csus2

C1+8

C1+5



CM7



C7aug

CM7aug

C7sus4



When the Source Root is C:

C = chord note

C, R = recommended

note

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-A1000

108

• NTT (Note Transposition Table)

This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available.

Bypass

No transposition.

Melody

Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.

Chord

Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano

or guitar-like chordal parts.

Bass

Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes on-

bass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS ﬁngering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines.

Melodic Minor

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by

a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a

semitone. Other notes are not changed.

Harmonic Minor

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in

the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and ﬂatted sixth

intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed.

■ High Key/Note Limit

• High Key

This sets the highest key (upper octave limit)

of the note transposition for the chord root

change. Any notes calculated to be higher

than the highest key are transposed down to

the octave just below the highest key. This

setting is effective only when the NTR

parameter (page 107) is set to “Root Trans.”

• Note Limit

This sets the note range (highest and lowest

notes) for voices recorded to the style

channels. By judicious setting of this range,

you can ensure that the voices sound as

realistic as possible — in other words, that no

notes outside the natural range are sounded

(e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo

sound). The actual notes that sound are

automatically shifted to the set range.

■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord

changes.

Stop

The notes stop sounding.

Pitch Shift

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord.

Pitch Shift to Root

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord.

Retrigger

The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord.

Retrigger To Root

The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note

remains the same.

C3-E3-G3

F3-A3-C4



2-A



2-C



3-F3-G



Example — When the highest key is F

Root changes

Notes played

E3-G3-C4

High Limit

Low Limit

F3-A3-C4



F3-G



3-C



Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4

Root changes

Notes played

109

PSR-A1000

Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator

The PSR-A1000 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases — which you can use in your performances in the

same way as the preset Multi Pads.

MULTI PAD

STOP

Operation

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

PART

BACK NEXT

Select the desired Multi Pad Bank for

editing. To record a new Multi Pad from

scratch, call up the RECORD page in

the Multi Pad Creator display and

select “New Bank” by pressing the [C]

(NEW BANK) button.

Record and Edit the Multi Pad. For details on the operations for

each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page.

Use the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons

to select the

RECORD or

EDIT page.

Call up the Multi Pad

display by pressing the

[I] (SAVE) button, then

save the recorded /

edited data to the USER

or FLOPPY DISK page.

Press the [EXIT]

button to close the

MULTI PAD

display.

END

Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator

PSR-A1000

110

The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109.

Start recording

First, select the desired voice. Press the [H] (REC) button to set the Record standby mode.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. You can also start

recording by pressing the STYLE [START] button. If Chord Match (see below) is set to on

for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major

seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B).

Stop recording

Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel STYLE/MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop recording when you've ﬁnished

playing the phrase.

Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off

■ Repeat

Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the

phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button.

■ Chord Match

If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be

automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords.

Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record

Select the desired Multi

Pad for recording or editing.

You can also select it by

pressing the MULTI PAD

[1] to [4] button.

Selects an empty Multi Pad

bank, allowing you to create a

new Multi Pad from scratch.

Select this to engage

the Record standby

mode (synchronized

standby).

Select this to save the

recorded pad data to

USER or FLOPPY DISK

drive.

Turn Repeat/Chord Match of each pad

on or off (see below).

Calls up the NAME display to

input the new name.

• Other notes besides those

of the C major seventh

scale can be recorded;

however, this may result in

the recorded phrase not

matching the chord when

being played back.

• The rhythm part of the

currently selected style is

used as a rhythmic guide

(in place of a metronome),

playing back during

recording. However, it is

not recorded to the Multi

Pad.

CRC CRC

C = chord note

C, R = recommended note

Others: non-recommended note

Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator

111

PSR-A1000

With this method, you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform

them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109.

The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 87), with the exception of the points

described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs

(page 96).

• Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you

to ﬁnely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat

playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback.

• Since the Multi Pads have only one track (channel), the track (channel) cannot be changed.

Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit

PSR-A1000

112

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound.

You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button

(page 58).

■ About the parameters

• VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 113)

This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto

Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 143) with the rich and dynamic voices

that are exclusive to the PSR-A1000. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your

song playback.

• FILTER (page 114)

These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound.

• TUNE (page 114)

These give you various tuning controls.

• EFFECT (page 115)

These control the amount of effect applied to the sound.

Mixing Console

This set of controls

lets you adjust the

balance of the

voices and their ste-

reo position, as well

as the amount of

effect that is applied

to each voice.

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

Operation

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

PANEL PART

Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/

Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song.

STYLE PART

Accompaniment parts

SONG CH 1 - 8

Channels 1 - 8 of song playback

SONG CH 9 -16

Channels 9 - 16 of song playback

Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters.

For information on the various parameters and settings and how

to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 113.

From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button

repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the

button switches among the displays listed below.

You can quickly and easily

set all parts to the same

value for the same parame-

ter (except for the VOICE

parameter). Simulta-

neously hold down the [A] -

[J] button that corresponds

to the parameter you want

to change and use the [1] -

[8] buttons or the [DATA

ENTRY] dial to change the

value.

For details on parameters

related to the Sound Cre-

ator, see page 80.

Close the Mixing

Console display by

pressing the [EXIT]

button.

END

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

113

PSR-A1000

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112.

Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

PART

Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of

the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special

voices of the PSR-A1000. To use the normal XG

voice set, turn this off.

VOICE

Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 51). When the

Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the

Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected.

PANPOT

Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard

left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right.

VOLUME

Determines the level of each channel, giving you ﬁne control over the balance of all the parts.

Selects the XG voices to

be replaced (voices

usually used when

playing back)

Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices

(when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON).

Executes the settings and closes the Auto

Revoice Setup display.

Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without

executing the settings.

Each press of this

button switches

among the various

parts/channels.

Use these to select the VOICE,

PANPOT, or VOLUME

parameter rows.

Allows you to select

the speciﬁc voice to

be replaced.

Keep in mind that using the

Revoice function may result

in unnatural or unexpected

sound, depending on the

particular song data.

ALL REVOICE

Replaces all of the replaceable

XG voices with the rich and

authentic voices of the PSR-

A1000.

BASIC REVOICE

Replaces only the recommended

voices that are suitable for playing

back the song.

ALL NO REVOICE

All the voices are returned to the

original XG voices.

These let you select

the voice of each

part, and adjust the

panpot and volume.

The [RHY2] categories in

the STYLE PART display are

only for the Drum Kit/SFX Kit

(percussion) voice.

The [RHY1] channel in the

STYLE PART display can be

assigned to any voice except

for the Organ Flutes voice.

When playing GM song data,

channel 10 (in the SONG

CH 9 - 16 page) can only be

used for a Drum Kit voice.

When changing the rhythm/

percussion voices (drum

kits, etc.) of the accompani-

ment style and song from

the VOICE parameter, the

detailed settings related to

the drum voice are reset,

and in some cases you may

be unable to restore the

original sound. In the case

of song playback, you can

restore the original sound

by returning to the begin-

ning of the song and playing

back from that point. In the

case of accompaniment

style play, you can restore

the original sound by select-

ing the same style again.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

PSR-A1000

114

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112.

PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 55, 80), this determines the Portamento time. The

higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only

applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).

PITCH BEND RANGE ...........Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is

from “0” to ”12” with each step corresponding to one semitone.

OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. The

value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button.

TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument.

Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

PART

Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters.

HARMONIC ........ Allows you to adjust the resonance effect

(see “Harmonic Content” on page 81).

BRIGHTNESS .... Determines the brightness of the sound by

adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 81).

Each press of this

button switches among

the various parts/

channels.

For details about the Filter,

see page 81.

Be careful with these con-

trols. Depending on the

selected voice, extreme set-

tings may result in noise or

distortion.

Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune

Portamento is used to cre-

ate a smooth transition in

pitch from one note to the

next.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO

TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING.

These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units.

MASTER ...Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback.

SONG........Transposes the pitch of the song playback.

KBD ..........Transposes the pitch of the keyboard.

Refer to the explanation below.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

115

PSR-A1000

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112.

Adjusting the Effects

There are three effect sec-

tions: Reverb, Chorus, and

DSP (which contains a vari-

ety of effect types). For

details, refer to the Effect

Block list (page 116).

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

PART

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Switches among the

effect sections:

REVERB, CHORUS,

and DSP.

Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information

about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 116.

Press this to edit and store

the effect (page 115, 116).

These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect.

BLOCK............Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects).

PART ...............Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only

when BLOCK is set to “DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and

VALUE is set to “Insertion.”

CATEGORY..... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This

parameter may not be available depending on the selected block.

TYPE ............... Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The

actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block.

Each press of

this button

switches among

the various

parts/channels.

Indicates the type name for each effect block.

When the BLOCK

parameter is set to

REVERB, CHORUS, or

DSP1-4/DSP, press this

to call up the display

from which you can

change the detailed

settings for the effects.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

PSR-A1000

116

Effect Block

Block Parts Characteristics Number of User Effect

REVERB

All parts

Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in

a concert hall or jazz club.

CHORUS

All parts

Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts

are being played simultaneously.

DSP

Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),

Style

In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this

section features a variety of special effects,

including distortion.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the

effect block.

Calls up the

display for storing

the effect.

Determines the effect category.

Determines the effect type.

Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted.

Determines the level of the

effect (return level). This is not

available when BLOCK is set

to “DSP,” PARAMETER is set

to “CONNECTION,” and

VALUE is set to “Insertion.”

Determines the value of the

selected parameter.

Calls up the display

for naming the User

Effect (page 42).

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the

destination to

which the effect

is to be stored.

The number of

memory spaces

available for the

destination differs

for each block

(refer to the chart

below).

Stores the effect settings you

made above to a User Effect

location (SYSTEM) for future

recall. To call up the effect, select

USER from the CATEGORY

parameter and select the desired

effect from the TYPE parameter.

Keep in mind that in some

cases noise may result if

you adjust the effect param-

eters while playing the

instrument.

Switches between

the upper/lower

parameters. For the

lower parameter,

the depth can be

changed when the

[VARIATION]

button is on.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

117

PSR-A1000

Effect Structure

The PSR-A1000 features the following digital effect systems. The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set

with the panel controls.

About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion

All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect

to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one speciﬁc part. Reverb and Chorus are System effects. The

DSP effect can be conﬁgured for either System or Insertion routing.

The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal ﬂow for the send/return

controls set on the PSR-A1000.

OUT

Rev Send

MAIN VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

When DSP is set as an Insertion effect

(here PART is set to MAIN),

it is put here in the signal flow.

Rev Send

LAYER VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

LEFT VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

STYLE/SONG

(each channel)

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

CHORUS

REVERB

DRY LINE

DSP

Chorus Return

DSP Return

Reverb Return

DSP

When DSP is set as a System effect,

it is put here in the signal flow.

PSR-A1000

118

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These

sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR-A1000 to your own musical needs and preferences.

Adjusting the Pitch — Master Tune

■ Master Tune (page 120)

This allows you to make ﬁne adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the

tuning with that of other instruments.

Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 121)

These allow you to set parameters related to song playback.

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord

Fingering

■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 122)

These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point.

■ Chord Fingering (page 123)

This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can

even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display.

FUNCTION

Operation

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

Select the desired function.

Set the parameters of the selected

function.

The operations for each function are

covered in the following explanations.

To return to the previous display, press the

[EXIT] button.

END

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

119

PSR-A1000

Making Settings for the Pedals and

Keyboard — Controller

■ Pedal (page 123)

These settings determine how the connected foot

pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches)

are used. They can be assigned to a variety of

functions, letting you control operations with your

feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/

off, or triggering Fill In patterns.

■ Keyboard / Panel (page 125)

These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the

keyboard (how touch affects volume), and the pitch

transpose settings (for the keyboard, song data, and

entire instrument).

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,

and Voice Set

■ Registration Sequence (page 126)

This determines the order in which the Registration

Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the

[BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal.

■ Freeze (page 126)

This lets you specify the settings you want to be

maintained or left unchanged, even when changing

Registration Memory presets.

■ Voice Set (page 127)

This lets you determine whether certain voice-related

settings (such as Effects, Harmony, etc.) are

automatically called up or not when you select a

voice.

Setting Harmony and Echo (page 127)

These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect

applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the

amount of effect.

Making MIDI Settings

■ System (page 129)

These determine various system messages settings

(such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well

as Local Control on/off.

■ Transmit (page 130)

This determines how playback data is sent to

connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are

assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also

lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over

each channel.

■ Receive (page 131)

This determines how the parts of the PSR-A1000

respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e.,

which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive

channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to

be received over each channel.

■ Root (page 131)

This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root

notes, for use with the auto accompaniment.

■ Chord Detect (page 131)

This determines the channel(s) recognized for the

chords, for use with the auto accompaniment.

Other Settings — Utility

■ Conﬁg 1 (page 132)

This page contains settings for Fade In/Out,

Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound.

■ Conﬁg 2 (page 133)

From this page, you can adjust the display, and

change the voice number indication.

■ Disk (page 134)

From this page, you can format disks, and copy from

disk to disk.

■ Owner (page 135)

From this page, you can set the language of the

instrument, and input your own name — which is

shown automatically every time the power is turned

on.

■ System Reset (page 135)

This function restores the PSR-A1000 to its original

factory settings. You can also specify which types of

settings are to be restored, as well as store your own

original settings for future recall.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-A1000

120

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.

Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune

Fine Tuning the Pitch — Master Tune

Hz (Hertz)

This unit of measurement

refers to the frequency of a

sound, and represents the

number of times a sound

wave vibrates in a second.

The Tune function does not

affect the Drum Kit or SFX

Kit voices.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the overall

pitch of the PSR-

A1000, from 414.8 -

466.8 Hz. Press the 4

or 5 [▲▼] buttons

simultaneously to

instantly reset the value

to the factory setting of

440.0 Hz.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

121

PSR-A1000

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.

Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings

Quick Start

On some commercially avail-

able song data, certain set-

tings related to the song

(such as voice selection, vol-

ume, etc.) are recorded to

the ﬁrst measure, before the

actual note data. When

Quick Start is set to “ON,”

the PSR-A1000 reads all ini-

tial non-note data of the

song at the highest possible

speed, then automatically

slows down to the appropri-

ate tempo at the ﬁrst note.

This allows you to start play-

back as quickly as possible,

with a minimum pause for

reading of data.

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

(page 141). The channels

are assigned as follows:

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Phrase Mark

This data speciﬁes a certain

location in the song data.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Turns Quick Start on/off (see note).

Allows you to play back all songs

from the same folder continuously.

Determines the MIDI channel assigned

to the [TRACK2] button.

Determines the MIDI channel assigned

to the [TRACK1] button.

When set to “ON,” this

automatically sets the proper

Track 1 and Track 2 channels.

Normally, this should be set to

“ON.”

Determines whether the Phrase

Mark Repeat function for the song

is on or off. When this is on, you

can repeatedly play back a

speciﬁed phrase (selection of

measures) of the song. The

method for setting a phrase mark

is the same as that in the SONG

POSITION display (page 69).

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-A1000

122

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting

and Split Point

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters —

Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

These select the part to which the split point

setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand

range, or both. Press the desired key for the split

point while holding down one of these buttons.

The pressed key is included in the range for the

Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard

(ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT).

A+L (ACMP + LEFT)

Allows you to simultaneously set the split

point for both the left-hand range and the

Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard.

Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to “ON,”

you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords

— even when the accompaniment style is not playing back.

The PSR-A1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 62) simply by

quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the

keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time.

Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,”

the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in

the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard).

Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting

different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped).

Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the left-

hand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each

independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these

buttons by themselves to set the split point value.

About Section Set

When any of the Main A-D

sections is not included in

the accompaniment style

data, the nearest section is

automatically selected. For

example, when Main D is not

contained in the selected

accompaniment style, Main

C will be called up.

L (LEFT)

Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard.

A (ACMP)

Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment area of the

keyboard.

About Section Set

When any of the Main A-D

sections is not included in

the accompaniment style

data, the nearest section is

automatically selected. For

example, when Main D is not

contained in the selected

accompaniment style, Main

C will be called up.

About Split Point

Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto

Accompaniment area (ACMP) and left-hand area (LEFT) from the right-

hand area (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than the

ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than the

LEFT split point.

Split point (A) Split point (L)

Split point (A) + (L)

Auto

Accompaniment

area

Auto Accompaniment area

+ Left-hand area

Left-hand

area

Right-hand

area

Right-hand

area

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

123

PSR-A1000

Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering

This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn

how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below).

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.

Making Settings for the Pedals

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the ﬁngering

type (page 59).

This lets you change the root

note from the chord.

This lets you change the

chord type.

Indicates the note that belongs to a

chord in the music.

Indicates the note that

belongs to a chord. Some

notes can be omitted. The

chord name is indicated

next to “CHORD NAME.”

.. Required

.. Can be omitted

.. Either note can be

omitted

.. Can be omitted when

the note indicated by

is omitted

The chord indication in the

display applies to the Fin-

gered method, regardless if

another method is actually

selected.

Chord Tutor

The Chord Tutor feature is

essentially an electronic

“chord book” that shows you

appropriate ﬁngerings for

chords; it is useful when you

want to play certain chords.

Simply specify the desired

chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼]

buttons, and the ﬁngerings

for the Fingered method are

indicated in the display.

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the particular

pedal to which a function is

to be assigned.

Determines the function to be assigned to the

selected pedal. Any one of the available functions

can be assigned to each pedal.

For information on the assignable functions, see

“Pedal-controllable Functions” on the next page.

If necessary, you can turn

the corresponding part ON/

OFF or set the control depth

(see the next page).

Pedal on/off operation may

differ depending on the

particular pedal you’ve

connected to the [FOOT

PEDAL 1/2] jack. For

example, pressing down on

one pedal may turn the

selected function on, while

pressing a different make/

brand of pedal may turn the

function off. If necessary,

use this setting to reverse

the operation.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-A1000

124

Pedal-controllable Functions

* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if

SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.

* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (FOOT PEDAL 2 only) to control the volume.

SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any

sustained notes.

SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the ﬁrst note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when

pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to

certain voices — PIANO, for example.

GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is

produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The

portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 114).

PITCHBEND*

Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the PITCH BEND wheel.

MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed

(FOOT PEDAL 2 only)

. Same as the MODULATION wheel.

DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button.

HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.

SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button.

STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button.

SYNCRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button.

INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button.

MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button.

MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button.

MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button.

MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button.

FILL DOWN A ﬁll-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left.

FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing.

BREAK Break starts playing.

FILL UP A ﬁll-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right.

ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button.

FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 59).

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the

ﬁngering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.

PERCUSSION

The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4

▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to

select the desired percussion instrument.

MAIN ON/OFF Same as the [MAIN] button.

LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button.

LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button.

SONG, STYLE, LEFT, LAYER,

MAIN

These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.

HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working. This can be set

for certain kinds of pedals, such as the foot pedal (YAMAHA FC7) (FOOT PEDAL 2 only).

UP/DOWN

When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).

RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.

ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed.

OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released.

KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular

drum kit used for the pedal.

PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This

determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

125

PSR-A1000

Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel

Keyboard Touch

The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to

customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences.

Transpose Assign

This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

HARD 2

Requires strong playing to produce

high volume. Best for players with a

heavy touch.

HARD 1

Requires moderately strong playing for

higher volume.

NORMAL

Standard touch response.

SOFT 1

Produces high volume with moderate

playing strength.

SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even

with light playing strength. Best for

players with a light touch.

Selects the desired

parameter: Keyboard

Touch or Transpose

Assign.

Determines the

Touch sensitivity

setting (Keyboard

Touch only; refer to

the table at right).

Determines the

ﬁxed volume level

when touch is set

to “off” (Keyboard

Touch only).

Determines whether Touch is on or not for the corresponding parts.

The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep

in mind that you can set each voice to a different

touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to

play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can

set this so that the voice is not affected by touch

(page 80).

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

KEYBOARD

For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the

keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and

the accompaniment styles.

SONG

For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of

the songs.

MASTER

For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the

entire instrument (keyboard voices,

accompaniment styles, and songs).

Transpose

Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices,

accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units.

Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE

ASSIGN, appears.

Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the

[EXIT] button.

• Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song

These settings can be used to match both the song and your

keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say

you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song.

The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D,

and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To

match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set

the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.”

This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data

down to your comfortable singing key.

TRANSPOSE

RESET

END

The transpose function

does not affect the Drum

Kit or SFX Kit voices.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-A1000

126

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets —

Registration Sequence

You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the

appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up

the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play.

Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze

This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration

Memory presets. For details, see page 78.

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Turns the Registration

Sequence function

on/off. When this is

set to “ON,” the

programmed

Registration

Sequence is shown at

the top right of the

Main display, and you

can step through the

sequence in this

display by using the

[BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons or the pedals.

Determines which pedal is used to advance

(increment) through the sequence.

Determines which

pedal is used to

reverse (decrement)

through the sequence.

Determines how Registration

Sequence behaves when

reaching the end of the

sequence.

Stop

Pressing the [NEXT] button or

the “advance” pedal has no

effect. The sequence is

“stopped.”

Top

The sequence starts again at

the beginning.

Next Bank

The sequence automatically

moves to the beginning of the

next Registration Memory bank

in the same folder.

Indicates the ﬁle name of the selected

Registration Memory bank.

Indicates the Registration Memory preset

numbers, in the order of the current

Registration Sequence.

These move the cursor position in the sequence.

Replaces the number at the cursor position with the

currently selected Registration Memory number.

Inserts the number of the currently

selected Registration Memory preset

immediately before the cursor position.

Deletes the number at the

cursor position.

Deletes all Registration

Memory numbers in the

sequence.

Setting Registration

Sequence Enable to “ON”

overrides any other Pedal

settings (for pedals assigned

to “Regist (+) Pedal” and

“Regist (-) Pedal” here).

These include the pedal set-

tings on page 123, and in

Voice Set on page 127.

When both “Regist (+)

Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”

are set to “OFF,” the pedals

cannot be used to step

through the Registration

Sequence; only the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons can be used

in the MAIN display.

When both “Regist (+)

Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”

are set to the same pedal,

“Regist (+) Pedal” takes

priority.

Registration Sequence data

is included as part of the

Registration Memory bank

ﬁle. To save your newly pro-

grammed Registration

Sequence, store the current

Registration Memory bank

ﬁle (page 35, 41). Any Reg-

istration Sequence data is

lost when changing Regis-

tration Memory banks,

unless you’ve stored it with

the Registration Memory

bank ﬁle.

Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button.

END

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

127

PSR-A1000

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set

When changing voices (selecting a voice ﬁle), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound

Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For

example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the

LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to “OFF” in this page.

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired part.

These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings

(Voice selection, Effects, and Harmony/echo assignment) are

automatically called up or not when you select a voice. These settings

can be turned on or off independently for each part.

Normally, these should all be

set to “ON.”

Harmony/echo cannot be set

for the Layer and Left parts.

Setting Harmony and Echo

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the Harmony type.

For details, see page 128.

Determines the lowest velocity value at

which the harmony note will sound. This

allows you to selectively apply the harmony

by your playing strength, letting you create

harmony accents in the melody. The

harmony effect is applied when you play

the key strongly (above the set value).

Determines the level of the Harmony effect.

Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill

effects. This parameter is only available when Echo,

Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above.

This lets you assign the Harmony

effect to various parts. For details,

see page 128.

When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony

effect is applied only to the note that

belongs to a chord played in the Auto

Accompaniment area of the keyboard. This

parameter is not available when Multi

Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in

Type above.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-A1000

128

About the Harmony Types

When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected

When “Multi Assign” is selected

Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to

separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the ﬁrst is played by the Main voice and the

second by the Layer voice.

When “Echo” is selected

An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.

When “Tremolo” is selected

A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.

When “Trill” is selected

Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo.

About the Harmony Assignments

AUTO

Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts.

Multi

This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the

Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be

played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice.

Main

Harmony is applied only to the Main part. When the Main part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.

Layer

Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.

Split point

Chords played to the left of the

split point control the harmony.

Harmony notes (based on the chord

and the selected type) are automatically

added to the melody played to the right

of the split point.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

129

PSR-A1000

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the

USER display, for future recall.For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 139).

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.

Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System

Call up the display as described in step 2 above.

Local Control

Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PSR-A1000

controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If

you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR-A1000’s tone generator

section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to

use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR-A1000’s internal voices, and use the PSR-A1000 keyboard to record

notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.

Setting the MIDI Parameters

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the desired template.

Call up the Edit display, then

select and set the desired

functions/parameters.

For details about each of the

MIDI edit displays, see the

following pages.

Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set)

All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer

and Left.

Master KBD The PSR-A1000 functions as a master

keyboard for controlling external tone

generators or other devices.

KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play

instead of the individual parts (Main/

Layer/Left).

Song All Transmit channels are set to

correspond to the Song channels 1-16.

Use this to play the PSR-A1000 song

data with an external tone generator, or

to record your entire performance to an

external sequencer.

Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and

PSR-A1000 synchronizes with a external

MIDI device.

MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the

keyboard voice and accompaniment

style with a MIDI accordion.

MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI

accordion control the accompaniment

style, as well as play the chord and bass

parts.

MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN

terminal controls the bass note of the

accompaniment.

MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN

terminal plays the bass part.

MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor

received.

Call up the User display

and press this button to

save the newly edited

MIDI settings.

Up to ten setups can

be saved.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

END

The saved settings can be named (page 38)

or deleted (page 40) in the User page.

For editing the Local Control parameters.

For editing the Message Switch

parameters.

For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock,

Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop

parameters.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-A1000

130

Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop

■ Clock

Determines whether the PSR-A1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an

external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PSR-A1000 is being used alone. If you are using

the PSR-A1000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-A1000 to

be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the external device must

be connected to the PSR-A1000 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.

■ Transmit Clock

Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is

transmitted.

■ Receive Transpose

When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PSR-A1000 is not transposed, and when it is set to

“ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-A1000 keyboard transpose (page 125)

setting.

■ Start/Stop

Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or

style playback.

Message Switch

SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF.

SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment

ON or OFF.

CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and

type) ON or OFF.

CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE)..........Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external

equipment ON or OFF.

Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit

This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent.

Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display

* Available in RECEIVE display only (page 131).

Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a speciﬁc note number which

corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.

Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data.

Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers.

Pitch Bend (PB) See page 124.

After Touch (AT)* With this function, the PSR-A1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that

pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater

expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.

FA, FC

MIDI messages for starting/stop-

ping the song or style. The “FA”

message corresponds to start,

and “FC” corresponds to stop.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the

channel for changing

transmit settings.

Determines the Part for the

selected channel.

Turns transmission of the

speciﬁed data type on or off.

See below for details on the

data types.

The dots corresponding to each

channel (1-16) ﬂash brieﬂy

whenever any data is

transmitted on the channel(s).

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

131

PSR-A1000

Receiving MIDI Data — Receive

This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received.

MIDI Receive Parts

Setting Root Note Channels — Root

The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment

section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings.

Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect

The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the

accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the ﬁngering type. The root notes will be detected

regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that

of the ROOT display above.

OFF No MIDI data is received.

SONG Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16

correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively.

MAIN The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

LAYER The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

KEYBOARD

MIDI note data received by the PSR-A1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard.

ACMP RHYTHM1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2.

ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS.

ACMP CHORD1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2.

ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD.

ACMP PHRASE1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2.

EXTRA PART1-5 There are ﬁve parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument

itself. When these ﬁve channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the channel for

changing receive settings.

Determines the Part for the

selected channel. See below for

details about the receive parts.

Turns reception of the speciﬁed

data type on or off. See page 130

for details on the data types.

The dots corresponding to each

channel (1 - 32) ﬂash brieﬂy

whenever any data is received

on the channel(s).

The MIDI IN/OUT terminals

and Port A of the TO HOST

terminal (Port A of the CBX

driver) correspond to chan-

nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO

HOST terminal (Port B of the

CBX driver) corresponds to

channels 17 - 32.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Selects the channels in groups of

eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25

- 32, respectively.

Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF.

Sets all channels to OFF.

The MIDI IN/OUT terminals

and Port A of the TO HOST

terminal (Port A of the CBX

driver) correspond to chan-

nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO

HOST terminal (Port B of the

CBX driver) corresponds to

channels 17 - 32.

When several channels are

simultaneously set to “ON,”

the root note is detected

from merged MIDI data

received over the channels.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-A1000

132

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and

Tap — CONFIG 1

Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time

These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out.

Metronome

These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters.

Other Settings — Utility

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the time it takes for the

volume to fade in, or go from minimum to

maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).

Determines the time it takes for the

volume to fade out, or go from maximum

to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).

Determines the time the volume is held

at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 -

5.0 seconds).

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the level of the

metronome sound.

Determines which sound is used for the metronome.

Bell Off ........................Conventional metronome sound, with no bell.

Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell.

Determines the time

signature of the metronome

sound.

When you start the song or

accompaniment style, the

values matching to them are

automatically set.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

133

PSR-A1000

Parameter Lock

This function is used to “lock” the speciﬁed parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls

— in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, or song and sequence data.

Tap Count

This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 48).

Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication

— CONFIG 2

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Selects the desired

parameter for locking/

unlocking.

Determines whether the selected

parameter is locked (checkmarked)

or unlocked (empty).

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the level of the tap

sound.

Determines the particular sound

used for the Tap Start function.

Any drum or percussion sound

in the Standard Kit (page 52)

can be selected.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the brightness of

the backlit display.

Determines whether or not the voice bank

and number are shown in the PRESET

page of the VOICE display (page 51).

This is useful when you want to check the

proper bank select MSB/LSB values and

program number to specify when

selecting the voice from an external MIDI

device.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-A1000

134

Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk

• Copying cannot be done

between a 2DD disk and

2HD disk. When copying,

make sure both disk are

the same type.

• Depending on the amount

of data contained in the

original source disk, you

may have to swap the two

disks several times until all

of the data is properly

copied.

• Make sure to read the

section “Using the Floppy

Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks” on page 7.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off.

When this is set to “ON,” the PSR-A1000

automatically calls up the ﬁrst disk song when

a disk is inserted.

This function copies all the data

from one disk to another, letting you

back up all your important data

before editing. For instructions, see

“Copying from Disk to Disk” below.

This function formats a

ﬂoppy disk (see below).

Source

disk

Copy Copy

Destination

disk

Internal memory

Copying from Disk to Disk

As shown below, ﬁrst copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PSR-A1000, then

copy the data to the backup (destination) disk.

Press the [F] button. A message

appears, prompting you to insert

the source disk.

Insert the disk containing the

original data into the drive and

press “OK.”

A “Now copying” message

appears, and the PSR-A1000

begins copying data to internal

memory. To abort the operation,

press “CANCEL.”

At the “Please insert a destination

disk and press the OK button ”

prompt, eject the source disk and

replace it with a blank, formatted

disk, then press “OK.” To abort the

operation, press “CANCEL.”

When the operation is ﬁnished

(or when prompted), eject the

destination disk.

Commercially available

music data is subject to

protection by copyright

laws. Copying commer-

cially available data is

strictly prohibited,

except for your own per-

sonal use. Some music

software is purposely

copy-protected and

cannot be copied.

Formatting a Disk

When using an unformatted disk for the ﬁrst time, make sure to properly

format it on the PSR-A1000. This includes blank disks as well as disks

already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the

disk.

Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To

start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the

DISK page above.

The Format operation initializes a disk

with a speciﬁc ﬁle system, allowing the

corresponding device (in this case, the

PSR-A1000) to access it properly.

Since there are several types of for-

mats and disks available, you should

know which ones to use with the PSR-

A1000. 2DD disks are formatted to a

capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks are

formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB.

Formatting a disk completely erases all

data on the disk. Make sure that the

disk you’re formatting does not contain

important data!

CAUTION

Disk Lamp

When the power is turned

on, the disk lamp (at the

bottom left of the drive)

lights to indicate the drive

can be used.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

135

PSR-A1000

Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 —

System Reset

This operation lets you restore the PSR-A1000 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI

Setup, User Effect, and Files & Folders.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press this button to enter an Owner

name (for instructions on naming see

page 42). This name is automatically

shown when you turn the power on.

Determines the language used for the

display messages. Once you change

this setting, all messages will be

shown in the selected language.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

These call up the corresponding Open/

Save displays. These let you store the

corresponding data as ﬁles for future

recall. From the PRESET page, you can

also recall the respective factory settings.

Restores the System Setup parameters to the

original factory settings. You can also restore

only the System Setup settings by

simultaneously holding down the highest key

on the keyboard (C6) and turning on the power.

Restores the MIDI

templates to the original

factory settings.

Restores the User Effects

(page 116) to the original

factory settings.

Deletes all ﬁles and folders

stored in the User page.

Executes the Factory Reset operation

for all items checkmarked above.

The functions and settings

below do not apply to the

Factory Reset operation.

However, you can restore

these to their original set-

tings by calling up the preset

System Setup ﬁles from the

PRESET page in the SYS-

TEM SETUP Open/Save

display.

Language

Owner Name

LCD Brightness

PSR-A1000

136

Using Your

PSR-A1000

with Other Devices

1 Using the Headphones

(PHONES jack).

A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in

here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal

stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a

pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack

(page 133).

2 Playing the sounds of the

PSR-A1000 through an

external audio system, and

recording the sounds to an

external recorder (AUX OUT/

OUTPUT jacks)

You can connect the PSR-A1000 to a wide range of audio

equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks.

Connect as shown in the illustrations below using

standard audio cables.

Before connecting the PSR-A1000 to other electronic components,

turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power

on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0).

Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may

occur.

CAUTION

AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)

MIDI

HOST SELECT

FOOT PEDAL

OUT

MIDI

PC2PC1

Mac

TO HOST

DC IN 16V

R L/L+R

OUTPUT

P.136

P.138

P.137

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance.

When the PSR-A1000 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are

connected to an external audio system, ﬁrst turn on the power to

the PSR-A1000, then to the external audio system. Reverse this

order when you turn the power off.

CAUTION

LR R L/L+R

AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)

OUTPUT

Audio cable

To powered speaker

RCA pin

plug

RCA pin plug

AUX IN

Cassette tape recorder

stereo system

Phone plug

(standard)

When these are connected

(with RCA pin plug; LEVEL

FIXED), the sound is output to

the external device at a ﬁxed

level, regardless of the

[MASTER VOLUME] control

setting.

When these are connected

(with standard phone

plugs), you can use the

[MASTER VOLUME]

control to adjust the volume

of the sound output to the

external device.

• If you connect the PSR-A1000 to a monaural device, use only

the OUTPUT L/L+R jack.

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices

137

PSR-A1000

3 Using the Pedal (footswitch)

or Foot Controller (FOOT

PEDAL 1/2 jack)

By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to one of

the FOOT PEDAL jacks, you can replicate the function of

some panel buttons, doing things like starting and

stopping accompaniment.

By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the

FC7) to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack, you can control any one

of a variety of important functions with your foot — such

as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play

(page 123).

4 Connecting external MIDI

devices (MIDI terminals)

Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI

device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the PSR-A1000. Make

sure to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to MIDI

when you use these connectors. For more information

about connections, see “What You Can Do With MIDI” on

page 142.

MIDI IN........... Receives MIDI messages from an

external MIDI device

MIDI OUT ....... Sends out MIDI messages generated by

the PSR-A1000

For a general overview of MIDI and how you can

effectively use it, refer to the following sections:

• What’s MIDI? (page 139)

• What You Can Do With MIDI (page 142)

• MIDI functions (page 129)

The polarity of the foot switch (normal or reverse) can also be

changed (page 123).

Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power

is turned off.

CAUTION

• Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters.

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices

PSR-A1000

138

5 Connecting to a Computer

(MIDI terminals/TO HOST

terminal)

Connect your PSR-A1000 to computer and take

advantage of the wide range of powerful and versatile

software for creating and editing music. The PSR-A1000

can be connected in three ways.

■ Using the TO HOST terminal

■ Using the MIDI terminals

■ Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional

USB interface (UX series)

Using the TO HOST terminal

Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-

232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST

terminal of the PSR-A1000. For the connection cable, use

the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that

matches the personal computer type.

■ IBM-PC/AT (Windows)

Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the

TO HOST terminal on the PSR-A1000 using a serial

cable (D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the

PSR-A1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2.” (Data

transfer rate is 38,400 bps.)

■ Macintosh

Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the

computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-A1000

using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set

the PSR-A1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “MAC”

(Data transfer rate is 31,250 bps).

Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are

using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owner’s

manual for the particular software you are using.

Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI

driver)

To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the

PSR-A1000’s TO HOST terminal, you need to install a

speciﬁed MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for

Windows). The Floppy Disk that came with your PSR-

A1000 contains the compressed driver ﬁle

“mididrv.zip.” After extracting the ﬁle, execute the

installation by double-clicking on the “Setup.exe” ﬁle

in the “MidiDrv” folder and follow the on-screen

directions. In addition, you can download this driver

from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site:

http://www.yamaha-xg.com

• Yo u ’ll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such

as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform.

• When connecting the PSR-A1000 to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn

off the power to both the PSR-A1000 and the computer before

connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After

making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of

the computer ﬁrst, then that of the PSR-A1000.

• If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-A1000, make

sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable is left

connected, the PSR-A1000 may not function properly.

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” “PC-2,” or

“Mac,” you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connec-

tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI con-

nectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is

set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO

HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST ter-

minal.

If your system does not work properly with the connections and

settings listed above, your software may require different settings.

Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT

switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1”

is 31,250 bps.)

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

MINI DIN

8-pin

D-sub

9-pin

MINI DIN

8-pin

D-sub

25-pin

D-sub

9-pin

PC-1 PC-2

MIDIMac

* When using a D-SUB 25P

→ MINI DIN 8P cross

cable, connect using a D-

SUB9P plug adaptor on

the computer side of the

cable.

MINI DIN

8-pin

MINI DIN

8-pin

PC-1 PC-2

MIDIMac

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices

139

PSR-A1000

Using the MIDI terminals

When using a MIDI interface device installed in the

personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the

personal computer and the PSR-A1000 with standard

MIDI cables.

• When the computer has a MIDI interface installed,

connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal

computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST

SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

• When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series

computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the

computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI

interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the

MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-

A1000, as shown in the diagram below.

Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the

TO HOST terminal is disabled.

• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the

MIDI interface clock setting in the application

software to match the setting of the MIDI interface

you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s

manual for the particular software you are using.

Using the USB terminal on your computer

with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96,

etc.)

Connect the UX256/UX96 and the computer with a USB

cable. Install the included UX256/UX96 driver to the

computer, and connect the UX256/UX96 to the PSR-

A1000 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch

on the PSR-A1000 to “MIDI.” For details, refer to the

owner’s manual of the UX256/UX96.

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer

and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant

owner’s manuals.

What’s MIDI?

Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as

representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you

strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and

plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string

and the note sounds.

But how does a digital instrument go about playing a

note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note)

stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is

played based on information received from the keyboard,

and output through the speakers.

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

PC-1 PC-2

MIDIMac

MIDI IN

RS422

MIDI OUT

MINI DIN

8-pin

PC-1 PC-2

MIDIMac

Personal computer

MIDI IN

USB

cable

MIDI OUT

UX256

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

PC-1 PC-2

MIDIMac

IN OUT

MIDI

Internal ampInternal amp

Tone generator

(Electric circuit)

Playing

the keyboard

Pluck a string and the body

resonates the sound.

Based on playing information

from the keyboard, a

sampled note stored in the

tone generator is played

through the speakers.

Acoustic guitar note

production

Digital instrument note

production

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices

PSR-A1000

140

Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a

recording. When you playback a music CD (for example,

a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound

(vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called

audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.

In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the

pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as

audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play

back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the

actual piano performance. The piano itself is not

necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds

of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.

The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration

above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic

example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard

is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In

order to record the audio performance on an acoustic

piano, special recording equipment is needed. However,

since the PSR-A1000 features a built-in sequencer that

lets you record performance data, this recording

equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument

— the PSR-A1000 — allows you to both record and play

back the data.

However, we also need a sound source to produce the

audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The

tone generator of the PSR-A1000 ﬁlls this function. The

recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer,

playing back the song data, using a tone generator

capable of accurately producing various instrument

sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another

way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator

is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays

the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data

and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our

piano performance played by another instrument, such as

guitar or violin.

Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets

recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the

sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note

using the grand piano sound on the PSR-A1000 keyboard.

Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated

note, the electronic instrument puts out information from

the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which

key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and

“when was it released.” Then each piece of information is

changed into a number value and sent to the tone

generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone

generator plays the stored sampled note.

Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic

instrument (audio data)

Recording Playback

Tone generator

Sequencer

Recording and playing back the performance of a digital

instrument (MIDI data)

Controller (keyboard, etc.)

Recording Playback

In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent

through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument.

Tone generator

Sequencer

Keyboard performance

(MIDI data)

Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-A1000 can

be thought of as containing several electronic components: a con-

troller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices

141

PSR-A1000

■ Example Keyboard Data

Panel operations on the PSR-A1000, such as playing the

keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored

as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs

also consist of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument

Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical

instruments to communicate with each other, by sending

and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program

Change and various other types of MIDI data, or

messages.

The PSR-A1000 can control a MIDI device by transmitting

note related data and various types of controller data.The

PSR-A1000 can be controlled by incoming MIDI

messages which automatically determine the tone

generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects,

change parameter values and of course play the voices

speciﬁed for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel

messages and System messages.

■ Channel Messages

The PSR-A1000 is an electronic instrument that can

handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO

HOST terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play

16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages

transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program

Change, for each of the 16 channels.

MIDI channels

MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen

MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the

performance data for sixteen different instrument parts

can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV

station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc

channel.Your home TV set receives many different

programs simultaneously from several TV stations and

you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired

program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The

transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc

MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single

MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving

instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel)

matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument

will sound according to the data sent by the

transmitting instrument.

For example, several tracks (channels) can be

transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as

shown below).

Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR-A1000 to

an external sequencer

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed)

and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed numerically

(quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Message Name PSR-A1000 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the

keyboard is played. Each message includes

a speciﬁc note number which corresponds

to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity

value based on how hard the key is played.

Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select

MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.

MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:

• The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI

songs to ﬂoppy disk.

• The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of

changing voices and transforming the data.

The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI

data.

Weather Report

News

MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

The PSR-A1000’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also

connected by MIDI (page 129).

MIDI cable or

serial cable

PSR-A1000 track (channnel)

MAIN

LAYER

LEFT

STYLE instrument

External sequencer

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices

PSR-A1000

142

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data

is to be sent over which MIDI channel when

transmitting MIDI data (page 130). The PSR-A1000 also

allows you to determine how the received data is

played back. (page 131).

■ System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI

system. System messages include messages like Exclusive

Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument

manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the

MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-A1000 are

shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI

Implementation Chart in the separate Data List.

What You Can Do With MIDI

The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSR-

A1000:

• MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various

applications) (page 129)

• Transmit (page 130)

• Receive (page 131)

• Local Control (page 129)

• Clock (page 130)

■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the

PSR-A1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a

external sequencer (such as a personal computer).

After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then

play it again on the PSR-A1000 (playback).

When you want to use the PSR-A1000 as an XG-

compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive

part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI

Receive (page 131).

■ Play and control the PSR-A1000 from a separate

keyboard

Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data

compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can

playback the data recorded by PSR-A1000, and whether

or not the PSR-A1000 can playback commercially

available song data or song data created for other

instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI

device or data characteristics, you may be able to play

back the data without any problem, or you may have to

perform some special operations before the data can be

played back. If you run into problems playing back data,

please refer to the information below.

Disk format

Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used

with various devices, including computers. Different

devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it

is necessary to ﬁrst conﬁgure the ﬂoppy disk to the system

of the device being used.This operation is called

“formatting.”

• There are two types of ﬂoppy disks: MF2DD (double

sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided,

high density), and each type has different formatting

systems.

• PSR-A1000 can record and playback with both types

of ﬂoppy disks.

• When formatted by the PSR-A1000, a 2DD disk stores

up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up

to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The ﬁgures “720 KB” and

“1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are

also used to indicate the format type of disk.)

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be

used is compatible with the format of the disk.

Message Name PSR-A1000 Operation/Panel Setting

System Exclusive

Message

Effect type settings (Mixing Console),

etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation

Personal cumputer,

QY series etc.

MIDI receive

MIDI transmit

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

PSR-A1000

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI receive

PSR-A1000

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices

143

PSR-A1000

Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence

format.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of

the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-A1000

is compatible with the following formats.

■ SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two

types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are

compatible with Format 0, and most commercially

available software is recorded as Format 0.

• The PSR-A1000 is compatible with both Format 0 and

Format 1.

• Song data recorded on the PSR-A1000 is automatically

recorded as SMF Format 0.

• Song data loaded to the PSR-A1000 is automatically

saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original

format.

■ ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-A1000 series

instruments.This is a common format used with various

Yamaha software.

■ XF

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI

File) format with greater functionality and open-ended

expandability for the future.

• The PSR-A1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when

an XF ﬁle containing lyric data is played.

■ Style File

The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle

format which uses a unique conversion system to provide

high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide

range of chord types.

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice

allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback.

The PSR-A1000 is compatible with the following formats.

■ GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System

Level1, as is most commercially available software.

■ XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1

format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to

provide more voices and variations, as well as greater

expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure

compatibility of data well into the future.

• Song data recorded on the PSR-A1000 using voices in

the [XG] category is XG-compatible.

■ DOC

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR series

instruments.This is also a common format used with

various Yamaha software.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,

the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the

speciﬁcations of the devices and particular data recording

methods.

PSR-A1000

144

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

• The PSR-A1000 does not turn on; there is no

power.

Make sure that the PSR-A1000 has been plugged in properly (page 16).

• A click or pop is heard when the power is

turned on or off.

This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument.

• Noise is heard from the PSR-A1000’s

speakers.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-A1000 may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from

the PSR-A1000.

• The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature;

try adjusting the contrast (page 17).

• The keyboard volume is low compared to that

of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback.

The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard

part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower

the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 58).

• The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or

song playback is low compared to that of the

keyboard.

The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set

too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display

(page 113).

• The overall volume is low, or no sound is

heard.

• The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the

[MASTER VOLUME] dial.

• The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of

MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 58).

• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 58, 69).

• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the

headphones.

• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 129).

• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-A1000. When this

happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played

notes sound. See page 146 for information on the maximum polyphony.

• Accompaniment style or Song playback does

not start.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”

(page 130).

• Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an

accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 58); to

playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 67).

•“New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an

appropriate song in the SONG display (page 67).

• The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the

beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 69).

• The Multi Pads do not play back, even when

one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed.

MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”

(page 130).

• Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP]

button.

• The accompaniment style does not start,

even when Synchro Start is in standby

condition and a key is pressed.

You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand

range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment)

range of the keyboard.

• The desired chord is not recognized or output

by the auto accompaniment.

• You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord

Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 60).

• You may be playing the keys according to a different ﬁngering mode, and not

the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the

keys according to the selected mode (page 59).

• An unexpected result or malfunction occurred

during an operation.

If, during execution of an operation, you simultaneously press three or more

buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure, unexpected or

unusual results may occur.

• Auto accompaniment chords are recognized

regardless of the split point or where chords

are played on the keyboard.

This is normal if the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.”

If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the

keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different

ﬁngering mode (page 59).

Troubleshooting

145

PSR-A1000

• Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,”

changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as

the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 72).

• Some channels do not properly play back

when playing back song data.

Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 69).

• The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard ﬁngering

modes. Select an appropriate ﬁngering mode (page 59).

• MIDI data is not transmitted or received via

the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables

are connected properly.

Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI” (page 139). The MIDI

terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings.

• When a voice is changed, the previously

selected effect is changed.

Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled

when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 127).

• There is a slight difference in sound quality

between notes played on the keyboard.

• Some voices have a looping sound.

• Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher

pitches, depending upon the voice.

This is normal and is a result of the PSR-A1000’s sampling system.

• Some voices will jump an octave in pitch

when played in the upper or lower registers.

This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this

type of pitch shift.

• Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1

megabyte of data to a ﬂoppy disk.

• The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or

Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display

(page 114).

• The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings

are appropriate.

• This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects,

especially distortion-type effects (page 115).

• Some ﬁlter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 81)

can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary.

• A strange “ﬂanging” or “doubling” sound

occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different

each time the keys are played.

Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the

same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 53) or change the voice for each

part (page 51).

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

PSR-A1000

146

Speciﬁcations

: available

Model Name PSR-A1000

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Display 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD

Keyboard 61 keys (C1 - C6 with Initial Touch)

Voice Polyphony (max) 32

Number of Voices 276 regular voices + 480 XG voices + 20 Drum Kits

Number of Oriental Voices 43

Number of Oriental Drum Kits 6

Number of Sweet Voices 3

Number of Cool Voices 1

Sound creator

Effects

Effect Blocks

Reverb 1

Chorus 1

DSP 1

Effect Types

REVERB 23 Preset+3 User

CHORUS 15 Preset+3 User

DSP 93 Preset+3 User

Accompaniment

Style

Number of Accompaniment Styles 190

Number of Oriental Styles 123

Number of Session Styles 4

Fingering Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,

Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Style Creator

Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ

Preset Songs

Lyrics

Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing

Record Channels 16

Multi Pad Preset 4 Pads ✕ 80 Banks

Memory

Device

Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD)

Flash Memory (internal) 260KB

Flash Availability Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc.

Tempo Tempo Range 5 - 500

Tap Tempo

Metronome

Sound Bell on/off

Specifications

147

PSR-A1000

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not

be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Thanks

YAMAHA Corporation wishes to express our thanks to:

Mr. Mohammed Saleh (Lebanon)

Mr. Sairos Isa (Bahrain)

Mr. Wadea Al Kandari (Kuwait)

Mr. Fawaz Al Kandari (Kuwait)

Mr. Arash Adelpour (Iran)

Mr. Dimitris Vassiliou (Greece)

Mr. Ahmet Can Basar (Turkey)

Mr. Mehmet Dogdu (Turkey)

for composing Styles/Demos and their cooperation.

Scale Scale Tuning

Scale Memory buttons 6

Scale Template Equal Temperament, Bayat, Rast, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Pythagorean,

Mean-Tone, Werckmeister, Kirnberger

Registration

Memory

Buttons 8

Regist Sequence

Freeze

Others Demo Function, Voice, Style

Language 3 languages (English, German, French)

Help

Direct Access

Master Volume

Fade In/Out

Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master

Tuning

Touch Response 5 level

Jacks/Connectors DC IN, PHONES, MIDI (OUT, IN), TO HOST,

HOST SELECT SW, FOOT PEDAL1 (SWITCH), FOOT PEDAL2,

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), OUTPUT (L/L+R)

Pedal Functions VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO,

PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG START/STOP,

STYLE START/STOP, etc.

Ampliﬁers/

Speakers

Ampliﬁers 12 W ✕ 2

Speakers (12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2

Power Consumption 31 W

Power supply Yamaha AC adaptor PA-300 (included)

*May not be included in your area.Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H]

(without Music Stand)

973 ✕ 399 ✕ 161 mm

[38-5/16" ✕ 15-11/16" ✕ 6-5/16"]

Weight 10.0 Kg (22 lbs., 1 oz)

Optional

accessories

Headphones HPE-150

Foot Switch FC4 / FC5

Foot Controller FC7

Keyboard Stand L-6, L-7

Model Name PSR-A1000

PSR-A1000

148

Index

Numerics

1 - 16 ............................................................................. 87, 96

[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 19, 35–42

A (ACMP) ........................................................................... 122

[A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 19, 37

Accent Type ....................................................................... 105

Accessories ............................................................................ 6

Accompaniment style parts................................................... 85

[ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 57

ACMP TOUCH .................................................................. 122

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 112

Adjusting the display contrast............................................... 17

Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 115

Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning ......................... 72

Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 47

Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 58

Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels... 69

Adjusting values ................................................................... 43

AI ......................................................................................... 59

AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 59

AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 59

A+L (ACMP + LEFT)............................................................ 122

Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 54

Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 61

Assembling an Accompaniment Style................................. 103

ASSIGN (HARMONY) .......................................................... 82

ATTACK (Regular Voice) ...................................................... 81

AUTO .................................................................................. 20

AUTO CH SET ................................................................... 121

[AUTO FILL IN] button................................................... 18, 63

Auto Revoice...................................................................... 113

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 136

[BACK] button.......................................................... 19, 37, 43

BALANCE............................................................................. 58

[BALANCE] button ......................................................... 19, 58

Bar Clear ............................................................................ 106

Bar Copy ............................................................................ 106

base note.............................................................................. 72

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 35

Bass...................................................................................... 85

Bayat.................................................................................... 73

Beat Converter.................................................................... 104

Boost/Cut ........................................................................... 105

[BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 61

BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 81

Cent ..................................................................................... 72

Change the Rhythmic Feel.................................................. 104

Changing Pitch-related Settings .......................................... 114

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings .......... 127

Changing the Icon ................................................................ 43

Changing the Tone of the Voice ......................................... 114

Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose ................... 125

Channel ................................................... 58, 69, 93, 106, 121

Channel Messages.............................................................. 141

Channel Muting ................................................................... 58

CHANNEL ON/OFF........................................................58, 69

[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................19, 58, 69

Channel Transpose ...............................................................95

CHD.....................................................................................97

Chord ...................................................................................85

Chord Detect ......................................................................131

Chord Events.........................................................................97

Chord Fingering............................................................59, 123

CHORD NOTE ONLY (HARMONY).....................................82

Chord Tutor ........................................................................123

Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode....................60

Chorus................................................................................117

CHORUS DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................82

Clock..................................................................................130

COMMON ...........................................................................80

COMPARE............................................................................79

Compatible Song Types ........................................................66

CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................132

CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................133

Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................137

Connecting to a Computer..................................................138

Controller ...........................................................................123

Cool! ....................................................................................52

COPY ...................................................................................40

Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................134

Copying Files/Folders............................................................40

Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................134

Creating Accompaniment Styles............................................99

Current Memory ...................................................................36

Customizing the Event List — Filter.......................................98

CUT......................................................................................39

Data Compatibility..............................................................142

[DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................19, 43

Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........130

DC IN terminal .............................................................19, 136

DECAY .................................................................................81

DELETE (Basic Operations)....................................................40

Delete (Song Creator)............................................................94

Deleting Files/Folders............................................................40

[DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 49

DEPTH..................................................................................82

DESTINATION......................................................................94

[DIGITAL RECORDING] button..........................14, 18, 83, 99

[DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................19, 44

Direct Access Chart ..............................................................45

Disk....................................................................................134

Disk format.........................................................................142

Disk Orchestra Collection.....................................................17

DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER .................................................133

Displaying the Lyrics.............................................................71

Displaying Upper Level pages...............................................41

DOC...................................................................................143

Drum....................................................................................52

[DSP] button...........................................................19, 54, 117

DSP DEPTH (Sound Creator).................................................82

Dynamics ...........................................................................105

ECHO...........................................................................55, 127

Edit .....................................................................................102

Index

149

PSR-A1000

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style............................... 104

Editing a Recorded Song....................................................... 93

Editing Channel-related Parameters ...................................... 93

Editing Chord Events ............................................................ 97

Editing Note Events .............................................................. 96

Editing System Events ........................................................... 97

Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 106

Editing Voices ...................................................................... 79

EFFECT................................................................................. 82

Effect Block ........................................................................ 116

Effect Connections.............................................................. 117

Effect Structure ................................................................... 117

Effects................................................................................. 115

EG........................................................................................ 81

EG ATTACK (Sound Creator) ................................................ 81

EG DECAY (Sound Creator) .................................................. 81

EG RELES. (Sound Creator) ................................................... 81

Embellish and enhance your melodies

— with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29

END Mark ............................................................................ 91

ENDING .............................................................................. 63

[ENDING / rit.] button.............................................. 18, 30, 62

[ENTER] button .............................................................. 19, 43

Entering Characters............................................................... 42

Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ........................... 90

Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)............................ 42

Entering numbers ................................................................. 42

Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent)................. 42

Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 135

Equal Temperament.............................................................. 73

ESEQ .................................................................................. 143

Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 141

[EXIT] button .................................................................. 19, 37

exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 37

Expand/Compress............................................................... 105

[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.................................... 18, 70

Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time ........... 132

[FADE IN / OUT] button................................................. 18, 62

[FF] button ..................................................................... 18, 69

File....................................................................................... 36

File/Folder-related Operations .............................................. 38

Files/folders in a floppy disk ................................................. 39

Fill........................................................................................ 63

Filter....................................................................... 81, 98, 114

FILTER BRIGHT (Sound Creator)........................................... 81

FILTER HARMO. (Sound Creator) ......................................... 81

Fine.................................................................................... 104

FINGERED ........................................................................... 59

FINGERED ON BASS............................................................ 59

First Key On ......................................................................... 92

FLOPPY DISK drive .............................................................. 36

FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN.................................... 134

Floppy disk drive.............................................................. 19, 7

FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack ....................................................... 137

[FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack................................. 19, 137

[FOOT PEDAL 2] jack .................................................. 19, 137

Formatting a Disk ............................................................... 134

[FREEZE] button.............................................................. 19, 78

Freeze .......................................................................... 78, 126

FULL KEYBOARD................................................................. 59

[FUNCTION] button .................................................... 18, 118

Gate Time ............................................................................ 88

GM System Level 1.......................................................17, 143

Groove ...............................................................................104

Groove parameters .............................................................104

GROUP SELECT....................................................................76

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........7

Harmonic Content ................................................................81

HARMONY ............................................................55, 82, 127

Harmony Assignments ........................................................128

Harmony Types ..................................................................128

[HARMONY / ECHO] button..........................................19, 55

Headphones .......................................................................136

Help messages can be displayed in any one

of the following languages.................................................46

[HELP] button .................................................................18, 46

High Key.............................................................................108

[HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 137

Hz ......................................................................................120

ICON....................................................................................43

ICON SELECT .......................................................................43

Inputting and Editing Lyrics...................................................98

Instant Selection of Displays .................................................44

INTRO..................................................................................63

[INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 61

Kbd.Vel.................................................................................88

Keyboard Percussion.............................................................52

Keyboard Touch .................................................................125

Keyboard/Panel...................................................................125

Kirnberger.............................................................................73

L (LEFT)...............................................................................122

Layer.....................................................................................53

Layering Two Different Voices..............................................53

LCD......................................................................................15

[LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................19, 17

Left .......................................................................................54

[LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................19, 55

Local Control......................................................................129

Loop recording .....................................................................99

Lyrics..............................................................................71, 98

MAIN A/B/C/D......................................................................61

MAIN [A] button.............................................................18, 61

MAIN [B] button.............................................................18, 61

MAIN [C] button.............................................................18, 61

MAIN [D] button ............................................................18, 61

Maintaining Panel Settings..................................................126

Making Global and Other Important Settings ......................118

Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)129

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,

Parameter Lock, and Tap.................................................132

Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number

Indication........................................................................133

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard......................123

Making Style File Format Settings........................................107

Master Tune........................................................................120

[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................18, 17

Mean-Tone ...........................................................................73

Index

PSR-A1000

150

Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 88

Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory ..................... 74

[MEMORY] button (REGISTRATION MEMORY)............. 19, 76

[MEMORY] button (SCALE MEMORY)............................ 18, 74

Message Switch.................................................................. 130

Messages................................................................................ 8

Metronome ........................................................................ 132

[METRONOME] button ........................................................ 18

MIDI .................................................................................. 129

MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals........................................... 19, 137

MIDI channels.................................................................... 141

MIDI IN.............................................................................. 137

MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 137

MIDI Receive Parts............................................................. 131

MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 135

MIDI terminals ........................................................... 137, 138

Mix ...................................................................................... 94

[MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 112

[MONO] button ............................................................. 19, 55

MONO POLY (Sound Creator) ............................................. 80

Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 39

MULTI FINGER .................................................................... 59

MULTI PAD [1] - [4] buttons .......................................... 19, 64

Multi Pads ............................................................................ 15

Multi Recording ................................................................... 85

Music Stand ......................................................................... 17

Muting Specific Parts............................................................ 70

NAME ............................................................................ 38, 41

Naming Files and Folders ..................................................... 38

NEW (Folder) ....................................................................... 41

[NEXT] button .......................................................... 19, 37, 43

Normal................................................................................. 92

Note Events .......................................................................... 96

Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)................. 138

Note Limit .......................................................................... 108

Nrm...................................................................................... 88

NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ........................................... 107

NTT (Note Transposition Table).......................................... 108

OCTAVE ............................................................................ 114

OCTAVE LEFT (Sound Creator)............................................. 80

OCTAVE M/LYR (Sound Creator).......................................... 80

Open/Save displays .............................................................. 35

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder .......................... 41

Oriental Scales ..................................................................... 72

Original Beat...................................................................... 104

Other Parameters in the Basic Display................................ 102

Other Playback-related Operations....................................... 69

Other Settings..................................................................... 132

OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ......................................... 19, 136

Overdub recording............................................................... 99

Owner................................................................................ 135

Pad....................................................................................... 85

PANEL SUSTAIN (Sound Creator)......................................... 82

Parameter........................................................................... 107

Parameter Lock................................................................... 133

PASTE ............................................................................ 39, 40

Pedal.................................................................................. 123

PEDAL 1/2 POLARITY ........................................................ 123

PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT ...................................................... 92

Pedal-controllable Functions .............................................. 124

[PHONES] jack.............................................................18, 136

Phrase...................................................................................85

Phrase Mark..................................................................69, 121

PHRASE MARK REPEAT......................................................121

PITCH BEND ..................................................................18, 55

PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................114

Pitch settings for each scale ..................................................73

Playback of Songs.................................................................21

Playing a style.................................................................28, 56

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only................................58

Playing Along with the PSR-A1000 .......................................32

Playing Back Songs on Disk..................................................69

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands.........27

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing

accompaniment sections ...................................................63

Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously.................................53

Playing Styles........................................................................28

Playing the Demos..........................................................20, 49

Playing the Internal Songs.....................................................67

Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through

an external audio system, and recording the sounds to

an external recorder ........................................................136

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously......................................26

Playing Voices ......................................................................25

Playing with the Songs..........................................................32

PORTAMENT TIME (Sound Creator) .....................................80

PORTAMENTO TIME (Mixing Console) ..............................114

Power Supply........................................................................16

Powering Up.........................................................................17

Power-on Procedure .............................................................16

PRESET drive.........................................................................36

Preset MIDI Templates........................................................129

Punch In/Out ........................................................................92

Pure Major............................................................................73

Pure Minor............................................................................73

Pythagorean..........................................................................73

Quantize.......................................................................93, 106

Quantize Size .......................................................................93

Quick Recording...................................................................84

QUICK START ....................................................................121

Quick Start..........................................................................121

Rast.......................................................................................73

Realtime Recording.............................................................101

Realtime Recording Characteristics.......................................99

[REC] button ...................................................................18, 83

REC END ..............................................................................92

Rec Mode .............................................................................92

REC START ...........................................................................92

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup.................................78

Recalling the Registered Settings...........................................78

Recalling the Scale Setting ....................................................75

Receive...............................................................................131

Receive Transpose ..............................................................130

Receiving MIDI Data ..........................................................131

Recording .............................................................................33

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment ......90

Recording Individual Notes...................................................87

Recording Melodies..............................................................89

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs................83

Registering Panel Setups .......................................................76

REGISTRATION EDIT display ...............................................77

Registration Memory.............................................................76

Index

151

PSR-A1000

REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons................... 19, 76

REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS ............................... 76

Registration Sequence ........................................................ 126

RELEASE............................................................................... 81

Remove Event .................................................................... 106

Repeat Playback of a Specific Range .................................... 70

[REPEAT] button............................................................. 18, 70

Resonance............................................................................ 81

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

of the PSR-A1000............................................................ 135

Reverb................................................................................ 117

REVERB DEPTH (Sound Creator) .......................................... 82

[REW] button ................................................................. 18, 69

Rhythm ................................................................................ 85

Root ................................................................................... 131

RTR (Retrigger Rule) ........................................................... 108

S.STOP WINDOW ............................................................. 122

SAVE .................................................................................... 41

Save ............................................................................... 35, 41

Saving Files .......................................................................... 41

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.............................. 77

Saving Your Scale Settings.................................................... 74

Scale .................................................................................... 73

Scale Memory ...................................................................... 74

[SCALE MEMORY] button .................................................... 75

SCALE MEMORY button....................................................... 74

Scale Setting......................................................................... 72

[SCALE SETTING] buttons .................................................... 72

SCALE TUNE BANK display ................................................. 75

SCALE TUNE display............................................................ 72

SCALE TUNE EDIT display ................................................... 75

Scale Tuning ........................................................................ 72

[SCALE TUNING] button...................................................... 72

Section button indications

— [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons ...........61

SECTION SET ..................................................................... 122

sections ................................................................................ 30

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,

Punching In/Out ............................................................... 92

Selecting a Voice.................................................................. 51

Selecting Files and Folders ................................................... 37

Selecting Intro and Ending Types.......................................... 63

Selecting items ..................................................................... 43

Selecting the Freeze Settings................................................. 78

SEQUENCE END................................................................ 126

Sequence Format................................................................ 143

sequencer........................................................................... 140

Set Up .................................................................................. 95

Setting an Oriental Scale ...................................................... 34

Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting ............................. 72

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters ............... 122

Setting Chord Channels ...................................................... 131

Setting Harmony and Echo ................................................. 127

Setting Root Note Channels................................................ 131

Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections

of the Keyboard ................................................................ 54

Setting Song-related Parameters.......................................... 121

Setting the Fingering Method.............................................. 123

Setting the Level Balance and Voice................................... 113

Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................................... 129

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ... 126

Setting the volume................................................................ 17

SFX....................................................................................... 52

Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ..

SINGLE FINGER....................................................................59

SMF (Standard MIDI File)....................................................143

Song ...............................................................................14, 66

SONG [START / STOP] button........................................18, 67

SONG AUTO REVOICE......................................................113

SONG CHAIN PLAY...........................................................121

Song Creator.........................................................................83

Song Playback ..........................................................21, 66, 67

Song Recording.....................................................................83

Song Settings.......................................................................121

SOUND (SOUND CREATOR)...............................................81

Sound Creator Parameters.....................................................80

[SOUND CREATOR] button ...........................................18, 79

Source Root/Chord..............................................................107

SOURCE1.............................................................................94

SOURCE2.............................................................................94

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory

Presets.............................................................................126

SPEED...................................................................................82

SPEED (HARMONY) .............................................................82

Split Point ...........................................................................122

[STANDBY/ON] switch.............................................14, 18, 17

Step Record ..........................................................................87

Step Record (Chord)..............................................................90

Step Record (Note)................................................................89

Step Recording....................................................................102

STOP ACMP .......................................................................122

[STOP] button (MULTI PAD)...........................................19, 64

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys................62

Strength ..............................................................................105

Style................................................................................14, 56

STYLE [START / STOP] button.........................................18, 57

STYLE buttons.................................................................18, 56

Style Creator .........................................................................99

Style File.......................................................................17, 143

Style File Format .................................................................100

Style Sections........................................................................30

Style Setting ........................................................................122

sustain ............................................................................81, 82

[SUSUTAIN] button ........................................................19, 54

Sweet!...................................................................................52

Swing..................................................................................104

[SYNC.START] button.....................................................18, 57

[SYNC.STOP] button.......................................................18, 62

SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)....................................................97

System ................................................................................129

System and Insertion...........................................................117

System Events .......................................................................97

System Messages.................................................................142

System Reset.......................................................................135

SYSTEM SET UP..................................................................135

Tap Count...........................................................................133

[TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................19, 48

TEMPO [

E] [ ] buttons..............................................19, 47

Tempo Indications — MAIN Display ....................................48

[TO HOST] terminal ...............................................15, 19, 138

TO HOST terminal..............................................................138

[TOP] button...................................................................18, 69

TOUCH LIMIT (HARMONY) ................................................82

TOUCH SENSE (Sound Creator)............................................80

[TOUCH] button.............................................................19, 54

[TRACK 1 (R)] button ......................................................18, 70

[TRACK 2 (L)] button.......................................................18, 70

Transmit..............................................................................130

Transmit Clock....................................................................130

Index

PSR-A1000

152

Transmitting MIDI Data...................................................... 130

TRANSPOSE [

E] [ ] buttons.................................... 19, 125

Transpose Assign................................................................ 125

Tune................................................................................... 114

TUNING ............................................................................ 114

Tuning the Overall Pitch .................................................... 120

TYPE (HARMONY)............................................................... 82

[UPPER OCTAVE] button ............................................... 19, 55

USER drive ........................................................................... 36

USER EFFECT (Function)..................................................... 135

User Effect (Mixing Console) .............................................. 116

Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/

Scale Memory................................................................... 72

Using the USB terminal on your computer

with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256, etc.)......................... 139

Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices ....................... 136

Utility................................................................................. 132

[VARIATION] button...................................................... 19, 55

Velocity........................................................................ 88, 105

Velocity Change................................................................. 106

VIBRATO ............................................................................. 82

VIBRATO DELAY (Sound Creator) ........................................ 81

VIBRATO DEPTH (Sound Creator)........................................ 81

VIBRATO SPEED (Sound Creator)......................................... 81

Voice Allocation Format..................................................... 143

VOICE buttons ......................................................... 15, 19, 51

Voice Characteristics............................................................ 52

Voice Effects......................................................................... 54

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button ......................... 19, 53

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button ............................ 19, 53

VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button .......................... 19, 53

Voice Set............................................................................ 127

VOLUME (HARMONY)........................................................ 82

VOLUME (Sound Creator) .................................................... 80

Volume/Voice .................................................................... 113

Werckmeister ....................................................................... 73

What You Can Do With MIDI ............................................ 142

What’s MIDI? ..................................................................... 139

XF ................................................................................ 17, 143

XG ............................................................................... 17, 143

153

PSR-A1000

MEMO

PSR-A1000

154

(standby)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som

den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har

stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá

selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

155

PSR-A1000

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-3273

[PK] 22 (PSR-A1000)

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panamá S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Claviers

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain

Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: 971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0661

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria

3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

??????? ???AP???.?-01A0

Printed in Indonesia

Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)

http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Transcripción de documentos

OWNER’S OWNER’S MANUAL MANUAL Before using the PSR-A1000, be sure to read “Precautions„ on pages 3-4. The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom) 2 PSR-A1000 Introduction PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The • • • required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. Use the specified adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in • damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, • • always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or • • • • (3)-7 extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. 1/2 PSR-A1000 3 Connections Saving data • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Saving and backing up your data • Current memory data (see page 36) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy disk/the User Drive (see page 36). Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a floppy disk. Maintenance When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution Backing up the floppy disk • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the • • • • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks. gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. (3)-7 4 PSR-A1000 2/2 Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-A1000! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the PSR-A1000. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. PSR-A1000 5 Accessories ■ PA-300 AC Adaptor* ■ Floppy Disk [includes style files, song files and MIDI Driver (page 138)] ■ Music Stand (page 17) ■ Data List ■ Owner’s Manual * May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference. Also, a separate Data List is provided. Introduction (page 3): Please read this section first. Quick Guide (page 20): This section explains how to use the basic functions. Basic Operation (page 35): This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls. Reference (page 49): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR-A1000’s various functions. Data List : Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. * The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. For example, the voice or style name appearing in the LCD screens in this manual may differ from that of the actual instrument. * The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English. * The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. * Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Trademarks: • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. 6 PSR-A1000 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Compatible Disk Type • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: • Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. Drive lamp When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. • Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the data is being written to the floppy disk. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. • If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a halfpressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that data is not being written to the floppy disk. If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in the following operations, the messages “Now executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting” appears in the display. • Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data (page 39 - 41). • Naming files and folders (page 38); creating a new folder (page 41). • Copying a disk to an another disk (page 134); formatting the disk (page 134). • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks. • Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Eject button PSR-A1000 7 About the Floppy Disks To handle floppy disks with care: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). write-protect tab open (protect position) Data backup • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to Disk function on page 134. About the Display Messages A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button. F G H I J For this example, press the [G] (YES) button to execute formatting. 8 PSR-A1000 You can select the desired language from the Help display (page 46). Table of Contents Introduction ............................ 3 Reference PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Accessories ............................................................... 6 About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 6 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk..................................................... 7 About the Display Messages.................................... 8 Application Index ................................................... 12 What can you do with the PSR-A1000? ................. 14 Setting Up the PSR-A1000 ..................................... 16 Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18 Playing the Demos .................49 Quick Guide ........................... 20 Playing the Demos ................................................. 20 Song Playback ........................................................ 21 Playback of Songs ....................................................21 Playing Voices ........................................................ 25 Playing a Voice ........................................................25 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands..........................................................27 Playing Styles ......................................................... 28 Playing a style ..........................................................28 Style Sections...........................................................30 Playing with the Songs .......................................... 32 Playing Along with the PSR-A1000...........................32 Recording ................................................................33 Setting an Oriental Scale ....................................... 34 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data ....... 35 Example — Open/Save display for Voice..................36 Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 37 File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 38 Naming Files/Folders ...............................................38 Moving Files/Folders ................................................39 Copying Files/Folders...............................................40 Deleting Files/Folders...............................................40 Saving Files ..............................................................41 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............41 Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................41 Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................41 Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 43 Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 44 Help Messages ....................................................... 46 Using the Metronome............................................ 47 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 47 Voices.....................................51 Selecting a Voice .................................................... 51 Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously .................................................... 53 Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 53 Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard ............................ 54 Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 54 PITCH BEND Wheel ................................................ 55 Adjusting the Octave setting ................................. 55 Styles......................................56 Playing a style ........................................................ 56 Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 58 Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 58 Chord Fingerings.................................................... 59 Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/ B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)..................................61 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 62 Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) ................................................ 63 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 63 The Multi Pads .......................64 Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 64 Chord Match .......................................................... 64 Multi Pad Edit......................................................... 65 Song Playback........................66 Compatible Song Types ......................................... 66 Song Playback ........................................................ 67 Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 67 Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................... 69 Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 69 Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks ............................ 70 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 70 Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 71 Tap Tempo ..............................................................48 PSR-A1000 9 Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/ Scale Memory ........................ 72 Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting............. 72 Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning ......... 72 Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory .... 74 Saving Your Scale Settings .................................... 74 Recalling the Scale Setting .................................... 75 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory ........ 76 Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory...................................... 76 Step Recording..................................................... 102 Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly ........................................................ 103 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 104 Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics ................................... 104 Editing the Channel Data ...................................... 106 Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter ..... 107 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator ............109 Operation ............................................................. 109 Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record ............ 110 Start recording...................................................... 110 Stop recording...................................................... 110 Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit...... 111 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups .................77 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 78 Editing Voices — Sound Creator ................... 79 Operation ............................................................... 79 Sound Creator Parameters .................................... 80 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator ..................... 83 About Song Recording........................................... 83 Quick Recording..................................................... 84 Multi Recording ..................................................... 85 Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 87 Operation ................................................................87 Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ..............89 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) ..............90 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode........... 92 Editing a Recorded Song ....................................... 93 Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel .......93 Editing Note Events — 1 - 16...................................96 Editing Chord Events — CHD...................................97 Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) ..97 Inputting and Editing Lyrics .....................................98 Customizing the Event List — Filter..........................98 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator ..................... 99 About Creating Accompaniment Styles ................ 99 Style File Format .................................................. 100 Operation ............................................................. 100 Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 101 10 PSR-A1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console ................112 Operation ............................................................. 112 Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice ............................................... 113 Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 114 Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 114 Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 115 Effect Structure ..................................................... 117 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function...........................118 Operation ............................................................. 118 Fine Tuning the Pitch — Master Tune................. 120 Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 120 Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings................................................ 121 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering......................................... 122 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 122 Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering ............................................ 123 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller...................................................... 123 Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 123 Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel ............................................. 125 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set..................................................... 126 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets — Registration Sequence.......... 126 Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .....................126 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set...........................................127 Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 127 Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................... 129 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System.................129 Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................130 Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................131 Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................131 Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............131 Introduction Quick Guide Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 132 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............132 Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2......................................133 Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk ...................134 Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner............................................................135 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset ......................135 Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data Playing the Demos Voices Styles Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices.............. 136 Using the Headphones (PHONES jack). ..................136 Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks) ..................................136 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack).......................................137 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals) .................................................137 Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................138 What’s MIDI? .........................................................139 What You Can Do With MIDI .................................142 Data Compatibility.................................................142 Disk format ............................................................142 Sequence Format...................................................143 Voice Allocation Format .........................................143 Troubleshooting.................. 144 Specifications ...................... 146 Index ................................... 148 The Multi Pad Song Playback Using Oriental Scales - Scale Setting/ Scale Tuning/Scale Memory Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups - Registration Memory Editing Voices - Sound Creator Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs - Song Creator Creating Accompaniment Styles - Style Creator Creating Multi Pad - Multi Pad Creator Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices - Mixing Console Making Global and Other Important Settings - Function Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices Appendix PSR-A1000 11 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular application and situation. Listening Listening to the internal songs ................................................................................................................ page 67 Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 69 Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 49 Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 51 Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR-A1000 ................................................................ page 113 Playing Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 125 Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 53 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 54 Changing the sound Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects ......................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 54 .................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 115 Adjusting the Level Balance ................................................................................................................. page 113 Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 53 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 54 Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 79 Playing the auto accompaniment Playing the accompaniment automatically ............................................................................................. page 56 Practicing Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 47 Recording Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 84, 85 Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 87 Creating your original settings Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 79 Creating accompaniment styles.............................................................................................................. page 99 Creating multi pads.............................................................................................................................. page 109 12 PSR-A1000 Application Index Settings Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 76 Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 120 Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 121 Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 122 Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 125 Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 129 Connecting the PSR-A1000 to other devices Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 139 Recording your performance.............. ”Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 136 Raising the volume ............................ ”Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 136 Connecting a computer........... .”Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals)” on page 138 Quick solution Basic functions of the PSR-A1000 and how you can best use it.......................................................pages 12, 14 Resetting the PSR-A1000 to the default setting ........................“Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset” on page 135 Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 144 PSR-A1000 13 What can you do with the PSR-A1000? SONG Playback previously recorded songs (page 21, 32, 66) Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs as well as songs on commercially available disks. 14 SCALE SETTING/ SCALE MEMORY DEMO The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create your own oriental scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory), whenever you need them. Explore the Demos (page 20, 49) These not only showcase the stunning voices and styles of the instrument, they introduce you to the various functions and features — and give you hands-on experience using the PSR-A1000! STYLE DIGITAL RECORDING Back up your performance with Auto Accompaniment (page 28, 56) Record your performances (page 83, 99) Playing a chord with your left hand automatically plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc. — and let the PSR-A1000 be your backing band! With the powerful and easy-to-use song recording features, you can record your own keyboard performances, and create your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions — which you can then save to the USER drive or a floppy disk for future recall. PSR-A1000 LCD SCALE TUNING VOICE The large LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy-to-understand control of the PSR-A1000’s operations. You can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale notes. Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices (page 25, 51) TO HOST terminal Make music with a computer — quickly and easily (page 138) Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music software. Connections and setup are exceptionally easy, and you can play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument sounds — all from a single PSRA1000! The PSR-A1000 features a wealth of exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices — including piano, strings, woodwinds, and more! Multi Pads Add spice to your performance with special dynamic phrases (page 64, 109) By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads, you can play short rhythmic or melodic phrases. You can also create your original Multi Pad phrases by recording them directly from the keyboard. PSR-A1000 15 Setting Up the PSR-A1000 Power Supply Power-on Procedure sure that the PSR-A1000’s STANDBY/ON 1 Make switch is at the STANDBY (off) position. 2 Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA-300. the PA-300’s DC plug to the PSR-A1000’s 3 Connect DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear panel. When you have made all the necessary connections (page 136) between your PSR-A1000 and any other devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers, amplifiers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI operation and prevents speaker damage. When powering down the setup, first turn down the volume for each audio device, then switch off each device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then MIDI). MIDI master (transmitting device) POWER ON!! DC IN To electrical outlet PSR-A1000 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device) the other end (normal AC plug) to the 4 Connect nearest electrical outlet. WARNING Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSRA1000, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE PSR-A1000 IS NOT IN USE. CAUTION Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor) during any PSR-A1000 record operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data. CAUTION Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the PSR-A1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. 16 PSR-A1000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L R Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier) Powering Up Music Stand CAUTION In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the PSR-A1000 before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. Likewise,always switch off the power of the PSR-A1000 after switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. CAUTION Even when the switch is in the "STANDBY" position,electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the PSR-A1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. The PSR-A1000 is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel. n Before you switch your PSR-A1000 on or off, first turn down the volume of any connected audio equipment. 1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch. → The main display appears in the display. GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. STANDBY ON BACK NEXT MAIN A F B G C H The Panel Logos The logos printed on the PSR-A1000 panel indicate standards/ formats it supports and special features it includes. XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the PSR-A1000 XG voices, it is possible to record XGcompatible song files. LAYER D I E J LEFT When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again. → Both the display and the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) will turn off. 2 Adjusting the display contrast If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST] knob on the rear panel. 3 Setting the volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. LCD CONTRAST XF Format The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The PSR-A1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files. The PSR-A1000 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.) Disk Orchestra Collection The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices. Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. The PSR-A1000 uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator feature. MASTER VOLUME MIN MAX PSR-A1000 17 Panel Controls and Terminals 5 6 7 10 9 73 72 71 51 4 8 38 32 11 12 13 33 14 34 35 36 15 37 18 16 40 17 39 41 42 19 21 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 C1 CLICK 36 D1 T 37 E1 38 S 39 POWER 1 [STANDBY/ON] switch ......................................................... P. 17 WHEEL 2 PITCH BEND ....................................................................... P. 55 PHONES 3 [PHONES] jack................................................................... P. 136 METRONOME 4 [METRONOME] button ........................................................ P. 47 SONG 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ...................................... P. 70 [TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................ P. 70 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ........................................................... P. 70 [REPEAT] button .................................................................. P. 70 [REC] button......................................................................... P. 83 [TOP] button......................................................................... P. 69 [START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 67 [REW] button........................................................................ P. 69 [FF] button............................................................................ P. 69 STYLE 14 STYLE buttons ..................................................................... P. 56 SCALE SETTING 15 [SCALE SETTING] buttons .................................................. P. 72 SCALE MEMORY 16 [MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 74 17 [SCALE MEMORY] buttons ................................................. P. 74 18 PSR-A1000 F1 40 R 41 G1 42 L 43 A1 44 L 45 B1 46 M 47 C2 H 48 D2 49 M 50 E2 51 H 52 F2 G2 L 53 54 H 55 A2 56 L 57 B2 58 M 59 L C3 M 60 H D3 C 61 1 H 62 E3 R 63 1 F3 64 R 65 G3 66 S 67 MASTER VOLUME 18 [MASTER VOLUME] dial...................................................... P. 17 STYLE CONTROL 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 [ACMP] button ...................................................................... P. 57 [BREAK] button .................................................................... P. 61 [INTRO] button ............................................................... P. 31, 63 MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 61 MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 61 MAIN [C] button.................................................................... P. 61 MAIN [D] button.................................................................... P. 61 [ENDING / rit.] button ..................................................... P. 31, 63 [AUTO FILL IN] button.......................................................... P. 63 [FADE IN / OUT] button........................................................ P. 62 [SYNC.STOP] button............................................................ P. 62 [SYNC.START] button .......................................................... P. 57 [START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 57 DIGITAL STUDIO 32 [SOUND CREATOR] button ................................................. P. 79 33 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button...................................... P. 83, 99 34 [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 112 MENU 35 [DEMO] button ..................................................................... P. 49 36 [HELP] button....................................................................... P. 46 37 [FUNCTION] button............................................................ P. 118 74 75 77 76 78 43 44 53 54 55 56 57 58 52 38 59 45 46 70 47 61 60 64 66 65 48 49 50 62 63 69 67 68 A3 68 C 69 2 B3 70 R 71 2 C4 H 72 D4 L 73 E4 74 H 75 F4 L 76 H 77 G4 L 78 H 79 A4 L 80 B4 81 82 H 83 C5 L 84 D5 S 85 L 86 E5 87 H 88 F5 L 89 G5 M 90 O 91 A5 92 DISPLAY CONTROL 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 [A] - [J] buttons ..................................................................... P. 37 [DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................... P. 44 [BALANCE] button ............................................................... P. 58 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ........................................ P. 58, 69 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons .................................................P. 35 - 42 [BACK] button ................................................................ P. 37, 43 [NEXT] button................................................................. P. 37, 43 VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button ................................ P. 53 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button .............................. P. 53 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button................................. P. 53 [ENTER] button .................................................................... P. 43 [DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 43 [EXIT] button ........................................................................ P. 37 [LCD CONTRAST] knob ...................................................... P. 17 VOICE EFFECT 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 [LEFT HOLD] button ............................................................ P. 55 [TOUCH] button ................................................................... P. 54 [SUSUTAIN] button .............................................................. P. 54 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ................................................ P. 55 [MONO] button ..................................................................... P. 55 [DSP] button......................................................................... P. 54 [VARIATION] button ............................................................. P. 55 VOICE 59 VOICE buttons ..................................................................... P. 51 TRANSPOSE 60 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................. P. 125 B5 93 94 C6 95 96 TEMPO 61 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................... P. 47 62 [TAP TEMPO] button ............................................................ P. 48 UPPER OCTAVE 63 [UPPER OCTAVE] button..................................................... P. 55 SCALE TUNING 64 [SCALE TUNING] button...................................................... P. 72 MULTI PAD 65 [1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 64 66 [STOP] button....................................................................... P. 64 REGISTRATION MEMORY 67 [FREEZE] button .................................................................. P. 78 68 [1] – [8] buttons .................................................................... P. 76 69 [MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 76 FLOPPY DISK 70 Floppy disk drive (3.5")........................................................... P. 7 Connectors 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 [TO HOST] terminal ........................................................... P. 138 [HOST SELECT] switch ..................................................... P. 138 MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals................................................... P. 137 [FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack...................................... P. 137 [FOOT PEDAL 2] jack ........................................................ P. 136 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks ............................. P. 136 OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ............................................... P. 136 DC IN terminal ................................................................... P. 136 PSR-A1000 19 Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing the Demos Reference on page 49 The PSR-A1000 features an extensive variety of Demo songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its dynamic rhythms and styles. Demo button What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of all the important features and functions of the instrument — letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the PSR-A1000 in your own music. 1 2 Press the [DEMO] button automatically plays MENU DEMO back the Demo songs at random. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo categories. BACK NEXT HELP FUNCTION Voice Demos showcase the voices of the PSR-A1000. Style Demos introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSRA1000 (page 49). For this example, FUNCTION is selected. Function Demos demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR-A1000. 3 Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs. For this example, press the [8▼] (AUTO) button. All of the function demos are played back in sequence. MAIN A F B G C H D I E J For details about the Demos, refer to page 49. LAYER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LEFT 8 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve finished playing the demo songs. When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PSR-A1000 even better with these functions: • Song playback (page 21) • Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26). 20 Quick Guide Song Playback Song Playback Reference on page 67 Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of the PSR-A1000 come together — in songs! Song related buttons Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 135) is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back. BALANCE and CHANNEL buttons Floppy disk drive The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR-A1000. Refer to pages 66, 142 for more details on the logos. Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard. Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control. Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format. Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200– 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Playback of Songs 1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive. CAUTION • Make sure to read the section “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 7. Quick Guide 21 Song Playback 2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. From the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on), you can select songs, voices, accompaniment styles, etc. A B C D E FLOPPY DISK (commercially available songs, your own songs, etc.) PRESET (Songs for Demos) Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive. In the example display at left, the PRESET page is selected; at right, FLOPPY DISK is selected. 3 Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder. A B C D E 22 Quick Guide Song Playback 4 5 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select the song file. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. REC TOP NEW SONG 6 START/STOP • To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button. • With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics on the display during playback. See page 71 for details. SYNC. START While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on — letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the fly! 1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button. 2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off. CHANNEL ON/OFF PART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 If the STYLE tab is selected, press this button again. Quick Guide 23 Song Playback 7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels of the individual parts — the song, the style, and your playing. 1) Press the [BALANCE] button. 2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust. BALANCE You can call up a full set of mixing controls by pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button (page 112). 1 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. REC NEW SONG 24 2 Quick Guide TOP START/STOP SYNC. START • The [FADE IN/OUT] button (page 62) can be used to produce smooth fadeins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the song, as well as the accompaniment. Playing Voices Playing Voices Reference on page 51 The PSR-A1000 features a stunning variety of over 700 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands. Voice related buttons Playing a Voice 1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press the [F] button to call up the menu for selecting MAIN voice. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Turn MAIN on. MAIN F LAYER G H The voice you’re selecting here belongs to the MAIN part, and is called the MAIN voice. (See page 53 for more information.) LEFT I J You’ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself — so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off. 2 Select a voice group. For this example, STRINGS is selected. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the voice. For this example, PRESET is selected. Quick Guide 25 Playing Voices 3 Select a voice. • You can instantly jump back to the Main display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A] - [J] buttons. A B C For this example, ”Strings” is selected. D E Press the corresponding buttons to select the other pages — and discover even more voices. 4 Press the [8▲] button to start the Demo for the selected voice. To stop the Demo, press this button again. There’s more to the Demo features than just voices, though–for more information, see page 49. Play the voices. Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also have the PSR-A1000 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲] button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically. Playing Two Voices Simultaneously 1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn the LAYER part on. MAIN LAYER 2 3 4 5 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part. LEFT Select a voice group. Here, we’ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound. Call up the “CHOIR & PAD” group. Select a voice. For example, select “Gothic Vox.” Play the voices. Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve selected here. And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features: • Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 79). • Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need them (page 76). 26 Quick Guide Playing Voices Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands 1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT part on. MAIN LAYER LEFT 2 3 4 5 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part. Select a voice group. Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play rich, orchestral chords with your left hand. Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. For example, select “Symphon. Str.” Call up the SPLIT POINT display (page 122). From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 122.) MENU DEMO A B HELP C D FUNCTION E 6 7 Play the voices. The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or voices). MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand. Split Point LEFT Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. MAIN/LAYER EXIT Quick Guide 27 Playing Styles Playing Styles The PSR-A1000 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your own performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion accompaniment to a full band or orchestra. Reference on page 56 Style related buttons Playing a style 1 Select a style group and a style. A B C D E For this example, DANCE & BALLROOM is selected. 2 For this example, VienneseWaltz is selected. Turn ACMP on. The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” area, and chords played in this area are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style. Split Point ACMP Auto Accompaniment area 28 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the style. For this example, PRESET is selected. Quick Guide • The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment area and the right-hand area of the keyboard is called the “split point.” Refer to page 122 for instructions on setting the split point. Playing Styles 3 Turn SYNC.START on. SYNC. START 4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). Split Point Auto Accompaniment area 5 6 7 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary. Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display. The Tempo can also be adjusted by using the [TAP TEMPO] button (page 48). Try playing other chords with your left hand. For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 59. Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style. And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features: • Easily create your own original styles (page 79). • Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need them (page 76). Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too. 1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on. LEFT HOLD VOICE EFFECT TOUCH SUSTAIN HARMONY/ MONO ECHO DSP VARIATION 2 Turn ACMP on (page 28). 3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard. The PSR-A1000 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 127). The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice. For details about Harmony/ Echo types, refer to the separate Data List. • Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 54). Quick Guide 29 Playing Styles Style Sections Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings, Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professionalsounding arrangements. INTRO MAIN BREAK ENDING 1-3 4 This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29. Press the [INTRO] button. 5 MAIN BREAK INTRO ENDING / rit. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). Split Point Auto Accompaniment area When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main section. 6 7 8 30 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK] button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure on the next page.) MAIN BREAK Quick Guide ENDING / rit. or Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a fill-in, if necessary. Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections. Press the [ENDING] button. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the style automatically stops. INTRO AUTO FILL IN FADE IN/OUT MAIN BREAK INTRO ENDING / rit. Playing Styles ■ Accompaniment Structure INTRO (page (page 63) xx) INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C INTRO D (max. four patterns) MAIN VARIATION via BREAK MAIN VARIATION B via BREAK MAIN VARIATION A MAIN VARIATION C via BREAK MAIN VARIATION D via BREAK Press the [ENDING] button. ENDING ENDING(page (page xx) 63) ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C ENDING D You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [ENDING] button again while the ending is playing back. (max. four patterns) • An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point. • Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the final eighth note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in. • Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want. • If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing. • If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section. Other Controls FADE IN/OUT FADE IN/OUT TAP TEMPO TAP TEMPO SYNC.STOP SYNC. STOP The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 62)when starting and stopping the style. The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details, see page 48. When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance. For details, see page 62. Quick Guide 31 Playing with the Songs Playing with the Songs Reference on page 66 Song related buttons Playing Along with the PSR-A1000 In this section, try using the PSR-A1000’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform. 1-4 5 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23. Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part. TRACK 1 To cancel the left hand part, press the [TRACK 2] button. (R) 6 If you want to see the lyrics, press the [B] button. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. A B C D E 7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part. If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[ buttons. REC NEW SONG 8 START/STOP SYNC. START Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. REC NEW SONG 32 TOP Quick Guide TOP START/STOP SYNC. START ][ ] • If you want to start the song right away without an intro, use the Sync Start function. To set Sync Start to standby, simultaneously hold down the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Song playback starts automatically the moment you start playing the melody. • If you can hear the PSR-A1000 playing the melody part as well, check the channel setting for the melody part in the song data, and change the channel assigned to Track 1 (page 121). You can also change the song channel itself permanently (page 94). Playing with the Songs Recording The PSR-A1000 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your keyboard performance. 1-3 4 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26. Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song” for recording. REC TOP NEW SONG 5 START/STOP REW FF SYNC. START Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button. SONG REC EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) 6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. 7 When you’ve finished recording, press the [REC] button. REC 8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. REC NEW SONG 9 TOP START/STOP SYNC. START CAUTION The recorded data will be lost if you turn off the power. To keep your important recordings, you’ll need to save them to the User drive or floppy disk. Save the recorded data as required (pages 35, 41). Quick Guide 33 Setting an Oriental Scale Setting an Oriental Scale The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create your own oriental scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory), whenever you need them. Reference on page 72 Scale related buttons 1 2 The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). Press the button corresponding to the key whose pitch you want to lower (the button lights). Press again to return to normal pitch. The scale settings you set are memorized by the Scale Memory function. While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY buttons. You can recall the memorized setting by pressing the appropriate button at any time. To maintain the memorized scale settings even after the power is turned off, make sure to save the settings as a file (page 74). In the SCALE TUNE display, you can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale notes (page 72). 34 Quick Guide Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data The PSR-A1000 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs, multi pads and registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR-A1000; you can also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument. All this data is stored in separate files — just as is done on a computer. Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the PSR-A1000 in files and folders. Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these displays according to their respective file types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder. The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button. Open/Save display for Style (page 56) handles the Style files. Open/Save display for Song (page 67) Open/Save display for Voice (page 51) handles the Song files. handles the Voice files. A F B G C H D I E J The following Open/Save display types are also available; however, these are selected from displays other than the MAIN display (page 135). • SYSTEM SETUP • MIDI SETUP • USER EFFECT If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 64, 109) Open/Save display for Registration Bank (page 77) Open/Save display for Scale Bank (page 72) handles the Multi Pad Bank files. handles the Registration Bank files. handles the Scale Tune Bank files. PSR-A1000 35 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Example — Open/Save display for Voice Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages. PRESET drive The files that are preprogrammed and installed internally to the PSR-A1000 are kept here. Preset files can be loaded but cannot be re-written. However, you can use a preset file as a basis for creating your own original file (which can be saved in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive). USER drive Files kept here are those containing your own original data, created or edited using the various functions of the PSRA1000. They are stored internally to the PSR-A1000. FLOPPY DISK drive You can also store your original data to floppy disk. Commercially available disk software can also be called up here. Naturally, these files are available only when the appropriate disk is inserted in the floppy disk drive. BACK NEXT Changes drives among PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK. Calls up the upper level directory page. In this example, the voice folder selection page can be called up. File All data, both preprogrammed and your own original, are stored as “files.” 36 PSR-A1000 Current Memory “Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive. Recording songs (page 83) and creating accompaniment styles (page 99) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a file or files. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Selecting Files and Folders Select a file shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice file. First, press the VOICE [PIANO] button to call up the display containing the files. This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store files (voice files). The PSR-A1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section. “PRESET,” “USER,” or “FLOPPY 1 Select DISK” by using the [BACK][NEXT] button. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT ENTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DATA ENTRY the [1▲] ~ [7▲] buttons to 2 Use turn the pages. 3 Select the file/folder. When the available number of pages exceeds eight, the bottom of the display changes as shown below. Press Next Press Prev.(previous) There are two ways to select the file/folder: • Press the [A] - [J] button. Press the letter button corresponding to the file/folder you wish to call up. (In the example display shown above, the voice files are shown.) • Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button. When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the highlight moves among the available files/ folders. Highlight the desired file or folder (voice files are shown in the example above) and press the [ENTER] button to call up the selected item. Double-clicking the appropriate [A] -[J] button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display. Highlighting the desired file and double-clicking the [ENTER] button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display. END Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the MAIN display. You can go back to the previous display by pressing the [EXIT] button. Exiting from small pop-up windows You can also exit from small pop-up windows (such as in the illustration below) by pressing the [EXIT] button. PSR-A1000 37 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data File/Folder-related Operations Naming Files/Folders You can assign names to files and folders. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset files/folders you wish to rename, copy them beforehand (page 40) and use them as User files/folders. 1 Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 35). A file/folder name can contain up to 50 half size letters (or 25 Hiragana and kanji letters), including the Icon ID (see the note below) and the extension. The NAME display appears. 2 Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons. To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The file name will appear on your computer as follows. If you change the Icon ID or the extension, the icon may change or the file may not be properly recognized. ABCDE.S002.MID A F B G C H D I E J 1 END 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input the new name (page 42). Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. 38 PSR-A1000 File ID Icon ID Extension Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Moving Files/Folders You can move files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below. 1 Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 35). The CUT display appears. This operation cannot be used to directly move a file/ folder from one floppy disk to another. If you want to do this, cut and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the USER page, then change disks and paste it to the FLOPPY DISK page. 2 Select the desired file/folder for moving. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to release or cancel the selection. All files/folders in a floppy disk can be copied to another disk in one batch (page 134). After being pasted, the files are automatically re-ordered in alphabetical order and displayed. 3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. 4 Call up the destination display. Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination. END Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. The file/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination. About files/folders in a floppy disk In the FLOPPY DISK page of the Open/Save display, only the files which can be handled in that Open/Save display will appear — even though a folder in a floppy disk can contain different kinds of files. In the case of a folder cutand-paste operation (for floppy disk), an entire folder can be cut; however, only the specific files which can be handled in the current Open/ Save display will be pasted. PSR-A1000 39 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Copying Files/Folders You can also copy files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below. 1 Press the [3▼] (COPY) button (page 35). Please note that the copy functions are intended for your personal use only. The COPY display appears. 2 Select the desired file/folder. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the currently selected folder (PRESET/ USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection. Press the [7▼] (OK) 3 button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. up the destination 4 Call display. END Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination. This operation cannot be used to directly copy a file/ folder from one floppy disk to another. If you want to do this, copy and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the User page, then change disks and paste it to the Floppy Disk page. Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. The file/folder you copied is now pasted at the destination. Deleting Files/Folders You can also delete files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be deleted, using the operation described below. 1 Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 35). The DELETE display appears. 2 Select the desired file/folder. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection. 40 PSR-A1000 END Press the [7▼] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The message “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears. YES ......... Deletes the highlighted item. NO ........... Exits from the prompt without deleting. When several files have been selected, the message “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears. YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or skips the highlighted item without deleting (NO). YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once. CANCEL .... Exits from the prompt without deleting. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Saving Files This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current memory (page 36) to files. The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK drives. If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, first return to the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 35, 36). the [6▼] 1 Press (SAVE) button. Enter a name for the new file (page 42). Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections. up the page to 1 Call which you wish to create a new folder and press the [7▼] (NEW) button (page 35). Enter the name of the new folder (page 42). The internal memory capacity of the PSR-A1000 is about 260KB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1440KB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PSR-A1000 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together. The files of commercially available DOC software and Yamaha Disklavier software, and their edited files on the PSR-A1000, can be stored in the USER page, but cannot be copied to another floppy disk. Folder directories can contain up to four levels. The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 400, but this may differ depending on the length of the file names. The maximum number of files which can be stored in a folder will be 250. Press the [8▲](OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. Displaying Upper Level pages Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from the file level pages. Entering Characters and Changing Icons the [1▼] 1 Press (NAME), [6▼] (SAVE), or [7▼] (NEW) button (page 35). Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button. The following types of characters are available: CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon at the left of the file name. PSR-A1000 41 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders. The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone. 1 2 3 Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter. Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button. If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the [7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the [7▼] (DELETE) button for a while. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is deleted. To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. ■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent) Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button (before actual entry of the character.) The following half-size marks cannot be used in naming files and folders: ¥\/:*?“<> | ■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a character by moving the cursor. Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button. ■ Entering numbers Press and hold down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected. 42 PSR-A1000 In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks, you can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button after selecting a character (before actual entry of a character). Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Changing the Icon You can also change the icon that appears at the left of the file name. Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from the character input display (page 42). Select the desired icon by using the [A] - [J] buttons, or by using the [3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter the selected icon by pressing the [8▲] (OK) button. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT Turns pages for icon selection. Enters the selected icon. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cancels the icon selection operation. Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display. ■ Adjusting values You can change parameter values by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the example [BALANCE] display, turning the dial adjusts the volume of the part in reverse display (highlight). To adjust the volume of another part, first select the part by pressing the [▲▼] button corresponding to the part, then rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. DATA ENTRY ■ Selecting items You can select the desired item or function in the display by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item can then be called up or executed by using the [ENTER] button. In the example VOICE display, you can select the desired voice file with the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up the selected item by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel. ENTER DATA ENTRY PSR-A1000 43 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays DIRECT ACCESS With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 123). DIRECT ACCESS ACMP Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 45) for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function. 44 PSR-A1000 Here’s a convenient way to return to the MAIN display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Direct Access Chart Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below SONG Corresponding LCD display and function [TRACK1] TRACK1 CHANNEL selection [TRACK2] [EXTRA TRACKS] FUNCTION TRACK2 CHANNEL selection SONG SETTING STYLE 121 121 121 [REPEAT] [METRONOME] See pages UTILITY [REC] — [TOP] — [START/STOP] — [REW] — [FF] — METRONOME settings 132 SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 122 [POP & ROCK] [LATIN & JAZZ] [DANCE & BALLROOM] [ ] [ [ ] [ ] FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT ] [USER] SCALE SETTING buttons SCALE MEMORY SCALE TUNE BANK [MEMORY] SCALE TUNE BANK [1]–[6] STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] FUNCTION 72 SCALE TUNE EDIT 74 CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection [BREAK] VOICE settings [INTRO] VOLUME/VOICE PANPOT settings MAIN [A] MAIN [B] MAIN [C] MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART) HARMONIC CONTENT settings FILTER BRIGHTNESS settings [ENDING/rit.] DIGITAL STUDIO EFFECT CHORUS settings FUNCTION UTILITY FADE IN/OUT setting STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting [SYNC. START] — [START/STOP] — [SOUND CREATOR] — [DIGITAL RECORDING] — FUNCTION [FUNCTION] [DIRECT ACCESS] UTILITY MIDI LANGUAGE selection 135 LCD BRIGHTNESS settings 133 MIDI settings 129 Exit from the Direct Access mode [BALANCE] MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) [CHANNEL ON/OFF] VOLUME settings VOLUME/VOICE [NEXT] VOICE settings 113 — [BACK] VOICE PART 122 — [DEMO] [HELP] 115 DSP settings [MIXING CONSOLE] MENU 114 REVERB settings [AUTO FILL IN] [SYNC. STOP] 113 VOLUME settings MAIN [D] [FADE IN/OUT] 122 — [MAIN] [LAYER] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE [SCALE TUNING] SCALE TUNE BANK SCALE TUNE BANK [EXIT] Return to the MAIN display OCTAVE settings 114 [LEFT] [ENTER] VOICE EFFECT — [LEFT HOLD] [TOUCH] FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting CONTROLLER KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment 125 REVERB settings 115 [SUSTAIN] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT [HARMONY/ECHO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO [MONO] [DSP] MIXING CONSOLE 122 127 TUNE [VARIATION] VOICE 32 PORTAMENTO TIME settings DSP settings EFFECT EFFECT TYPE selection 114 115 [PIANO] [ORGAN & ACCORDION] [GUITAR] [TRUMPET] [SAX & FLUTE] [STRINGS] FUNCTION VOICE SET settings [E ] FUNCTION CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE assignment 125 [ E MIXING CONSOLE TUNE TRANSPOSE settings 114 E FUNCTION MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 129 UTILITY TAP settings 133 [CHOIR & PAD] 127 [SYNTHESIZER] [XG] [ ] [PERCUSSION] [USER] TRANSPOSE TEMPO ] [E ] [ ] [TAP TEMPO] UPPER OCTAVE [E ] — [ — E MULTI PAD ] [1] [2] MULTI PAD MULTI PAD EDIT [STOP] DIGITAL RECORDING MULTI PAD CREATOR [FREEZE] FUNCTION FREEZE 126 REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the RAGISTRATION) 77 [3] 64 [4] REGISTRATION MEMORY REPEAT / CHORD MATCH settings 110 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [MEMORY] PEDAL [PEDAL1] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) FUNCTION [PEDAL2] WHEEL [PITCH BEND] MIXING CONSOLE CONTROLLER TUNE PEDAL1 function assignment PEDAL2 function assignment PITCH BEND RANGE settings 126 123 114 PSR-A1000 45 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Help Messages The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR-A1000. HELP 1 MENU DEMO 2 Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages: ENGLISH GERMAN FRENCH HELP FUNCTION The language can also be selected in the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE” (page 135) display. 1 2-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2-2 Select the desired Help topic. 8 Call up the topic. Select the Language, if necessary. The language selected here are also used for various “Messages” shown during operations. 3 BACK NEXT When two or more pages available, use this to select different pages. ENTER END Press this to return to the previous display. EXIT DATA ENTRY Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word (using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. 46 PSR-A1000 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and check how a specific tempo sounds. METRONOME The metronome starts by pressing the [METRONOME] button. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below). To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again. The sound, volume level, and the beat (time signature) of the metronome can all be changed (page 132). Adjusting the Tempo This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of a song or an accompaniment style. TAP TEMPO TEMPO RESET 1 TAP TEMPO TEMPO 2 RESET Press either the TEMPO [ button or the [ ] button. E Press this to ND close the TEMPO display. Songs and accompaniment styles have been given default (initial) tempo settings, designed to best suit the song/style. Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo. ] EXIT When you change the tempo, both tempos of the current song and style will be changed to the same tempo. To restore their respective default (initial) tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo Indications — MAIN display” (page 48) for more about tempo. PSR-A1000 47 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Tap Tempo This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style. Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping. the song or the 1 Playback accompaniment style (page 56, 67). 2 TAP TEMPO TEMPO RESET Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice to change the tempo. ■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below. Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected song (unless the tempo has been changed manually). Indicates the current tempo for the selected song, accompaniment style or the metronome which is now playing back. When nothing is playing back (stopped), this indicates the tempo for the selected style. When the song and style are played back simultaneously, the tempo of the style is automatically changed to match the tempo of the song, and is displayed here. This tempo is used for recording when recording a song or accompaniment style. Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected accompaniment style (unless the tempo has been changed manually). 48 PSR-A1000 Hitting the [TAP TEMPO] button produces a tapping sound. You can change this sound, if desired (page 133). n You can also use Tap Tempo to automatically start the song or accompaniment style at the desired tempo. While both the song and accompaniment style are stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button several times, and the selected accompaniment style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. While a song is set to Sync. Start stand-by (page 57, 67), tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button starts the song playback in the same manner. For songs and styles in 2/4 and 4/4 time, tap four times; for 3/4 time, tap three times; for 5/4 time, tap five times. Playing the Demos The PSR-A1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR-A1000. Reference MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION 1 MENU DEMO Pressing the [DEMO] button automatically plays back the Demo songs at random. HELP FUNCTION 2 2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category. Function Demos........ These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR-A1000. Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices of the PSR-A1000. Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSR-A1000. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT 2-3 1 2-2 2 Use these to select different display pages. 3 4 5 6 7 Press one of these buttons twice — once to select the desired demo, and once again to start it. 8 Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting from the first item at the top left of the display. This is available only from the FUNCTION page. All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button; however, all demo songs are played back in sequence. Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos (otherwise available in step 3 below). PSR-A1000 49 Playing the Demos 3 For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and the Demo starts playing. BACK This example shows the Sound System in the FUNCTION demo. NEXT n Press the SONG [START/ STOP] button to stop the Demo song. To start the Demo again from the point at which it was stopped, press the SONG [START/ STOP] button again. Rewind and fast-forward can also be used with the Demo songs (page 69). MAIN F LAYER G H LEFT I J Select the desired word or item by using the [DATAENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.) to call it up. EXIT END Return to the MAIN screen. 50 PSR-A1000 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons in the introduction screen to call up the previous or next page. ENTER Voices The PSR-A1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings and brass — and many, many more. Selecting a Voice 1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press [F] button to call up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice. MAIN Turn MAIN on. The voice you’re selecting here belongs to the MAIN part, and is called the MAIN voice. (See page 53 for more information.) F LAYER G H I LEFT You’ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself — so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off. J 2 Select the desired voice group. When you select a voice group, the last selected voice will automatically be selected. PSR-A1000 51 Voices 3 Indicates that the display is for selecting the MAIN voice (page 25). BACK 3-1 A F B G C H D I E J NEXT Select the memory location of the voice (PRESET/ USER/ FLOPPY DISK). Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited effect and other settings for that particular voice. You can disable this so that settings are not automatically selected (page 127). n You can set how much the volume of the voice changes according to your playing strength (page 125). n 3-3 Select the voice. For a list of the available voices, refer to the separate Data List. n 3-2 Select the various pages in the current voice group. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press this to start the demo of the selected voice. To stop the demo at any time, press this button again. 8 Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group. 4 Play the keyboard to hear the selected voice. END You can set whether the voice bank and program change numbers (“MSBLSB-Program Change number” at the right above the voice name) are displayed or not (page 133). n Press this to return to the MAIN EXIT display. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Voice Characteristics The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name. Cool! These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming. Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing! Drum Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Keyboard Percussion When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical. Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit. 52 PSR-A1000 Voices Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously The PSR-A1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance. MAIN LAYER LEFT Playing a layer of two voices LAYER part MAIN part Playing two voices separately — on the left and right sections of the keyboard Split point LEFT part MAIN part Left range Playing three different voices — one on the left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of two on the right Right range Split point LAYER part LEFT part MAIN part Left range Right range Layer — Layering Two Different Voices 1 Press this to turn the LAYER function on. To turn it off, press the button again. MAIN 2 Select Layer with the [G] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specific voice you want to play in a layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN) display (page 51). LAYER There is an alternate way for quickly selecting both the MAIN and LAYER voices from the panel: While holding down one panel voice button, press a second voice button. The first selected voice becomes the MAIN voice, and the second becomes the LAYER. LEFT F G H I J E Press this to ND return to the MAIN display. EXIT PSR-A1000 53 Voices Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard 1 Set the LEFT to ON. Press this button again to set it to OFF. MAIN 2 Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specific voice you want to play in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 51). LAYER The split point can be freely set to any key on the keyboard. (page 122). n Each part (MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT) can have its own volume setting (page 58). n LEFT F G H I J END EXIT You can also use the LAYER and LEFT functions together, to create a combination layer/split. To do this, set separate voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard (as indicated), and set up a layer of two different voices on the right. Press this to return to the MAIN display. Applying Voice Effects This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard. LEFT HOLD VOICE EFFECT TOUCH SUSTAIN HARMONY/ MONO ECHO DSP VARIATION Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off. For explanations on each of the effects, see below. ■ TOUCH This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When this is set to off, the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard. ■ SUSTAIN When this Sustain feature is on, all notes played on the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER parts only) have a longer sustain. You can also set the Sustain depth (page 82). ■ DSP The PSR-A1000 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways — such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). 54 PSR-A1000 The DSP and VARIATION effect types and the their depth can be selected and adjusted in the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 115). Voices ■ VARIATION This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 115), this lets you switch the rotor speed between slow and fast. ■ HARMONY/ECHO This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section of the keyboard (page 127). The Portamento effect creates a smooth pitch glide between successively played notes. ■ MONO This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically. Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the Portamento effect, when playing in legato. ■ LEFT HOLD This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall accompaniment sound. You can add special emphasis to melody lines you play over chords by using the Layer function with a monophonic voice. Set the Main voice to play polyphonically and set the Layer voice to play monophonically (MONO). In this case, the melody you play — including the top notes of any chords — sounds monophonically. Try this using the following voices. MAIN voice: Brass Section (polyphonic) + LAYER voice: Sweet Trump (monophonic) PITCH BEND Wheel Use the PSR-A1000 PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The PITCH BEND wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. PITCH BEND The maximum pitch bend range can be changed (page 114). Adjusting the Octave setting The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously transposed up or down by one octave. UPPER OCTAVE RESET More detailed octave-related settings for each part can be made by using the Mixing Console function (page 114). PSR-A1000 55 Styles The PSR-A1000 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz, Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN BREAK SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. INTRO AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Playing a style 1 2 BACK A F B G C H D I E J 1 56 PSR-A1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NEXT For a list of the available accompaniment styles, refer to the separate Data List. 2-1 Select a location (Preset, User, Floppy Disk) for saving the style. 2-2 Select a Style. When you've opened a lower directory's display, this button (UP) lets you call up the next higher directory, from which you can select Style groups. Styles 3 When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.) STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO ENDING / rit. SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN 4 START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on. STYLE CONTROL ACMP SYNC. START You can set the key range for auto accompaniment (page 122). MAIN BREAK INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT 5 As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment area, the style starts. For details about chord fingerings, refer to page 59. Split point The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] button. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped. Auto Accompaniment area 6 Stop the style. SYNC. STOP SYNC. START START/STOP END Turn ACMP off. STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK INTRO Sync. Start Enabling this lets you start the style simply by playing the keyboard. • You can begin the rhythm channels (tracks) of the Style by pressing the [START/STOP] button. • The rhythm channels of the style can also be started by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button. With the style stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button three, four or five times (three for 3/4 time, four for 2/4 or 4/4 time, five for 5/4 time). When you simultaneously play back accompaniment styles with a song, the accompaniment parts recorded to the song (channels 9 - 16) are temporarily replaced by the selected accompaniment style — letting you try out and use different accompaniment with the song (page 68). Accompaniment Style Characteristics The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display. Session! These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment. Piano Combo! (Floppy Disk) These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs. PSR-A1000 57 Styles Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only 1 The Rhythm channels are part of the styles. Each style has different rhythm patterns. Select a style (page 56). 2 You can also start the rhythm simply by playing a key on the keyboard, if Sync Start is enabled (turn on the [SYNC.START] button). Rhythm starts. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN INTRO BREAK ENDING / rit. SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Set to off. 3 Play along with the rhythm playback. The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped. END Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button again to stop the rhythm playback. Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting BALANCE display MULTI PAD part Call up the BALANCE display. STYLE part (Auto Accompaniment area) SONG part BALANCE Parts played from the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/ LEFT) Adjust the output level of the Part. CHANNEL ON/OFF CHANNEL ON/OFF display PART Call up the Channel ON/ OFF display. 58 PSR-A1000 Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data (page 141). The channels are assigned as shown below. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 Styles Chord Fingerings The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of fingerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 123), and select the Chord Fingerings. The page shows how to play chords with your left hand. SINGLE FINGER Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used. For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. MULTI FINGER The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. If you want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the root of the chord. FINGERED This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page. FINGERED ON BASS This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C). FULL KEYBOARD This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. AI FINGERED This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). Chord detection in the AI Full Keyboard mode occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords — less than an 8th note in length — may not be detected. In Full Keyboard mode, chords are detected based on the lowest and second lowest notes you play. If the two lowest notes fall within a single octave, those two notes determine the chord. If the lowest note and the second lowest note are separated by more than one octave, the lowest note becomes the bass and the chord is determined from the second lowest note and the other notes played in the same octave. AI Artificial Intelligence AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PSR-A1000 will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. This mode is similar to FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th and 11th chords cannot be played. PSR-A1000 59 Styles Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords) CmM7 CmM7 9 ( ) ( ( C5 CM7 5 Cm7 9 Cm7 11 ) CM7aug 11 ( Caug CM7 ) Csus4 CM7 9 CM7 ) C6 ) C9 ( C6 9 C Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7 13 C7 9 C7 5 C7aug C7sus4 Normal Voicing Display for root “C” Major [M] 1-3-5 C Ninth [9] 1-2-3-5 C9 Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [69] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C69 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7 Major seventh [M7] [M79] Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7 Flatted fifth [ 5] 11 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 5] Suspended fourth [sus4] Augmented [aug] Major seventh augmented [M7aug] Minor [m] Minor ninth [m9] Minor sixth [m6] 1-4-5 1-3- 5 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1- 3-5 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Minor seventh [m7] Minor seventh ninth [m79] Minor seventh eleventh [m711] Minor major seventh [mM7] [mM79] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 5] Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 Seventh [7] Seventh flatted ninth [7 9] Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7 13] Seventh ninth [79] Seventh add sharp eleventh [7 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - 5 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Diminished [dim] Seventh add thirteenth ] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM79 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 CM7 11 1 - 3 - 5 C 5 1-3- 5-7 CM7 5 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Minor major seventh ninth 11 ] [713] 9 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 Csus4 Caug CM7aug Cm Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm79 Cm711 CmM7 CmM79 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7 9 C7 13 C79 C7 11 C713 C7 9 C7 5 Seventh sharp ninth [7 ] Seventh flatted fifth [7 5] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Seventh augmented [7aug] C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 Csus2 PSR-A1000 ) • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • For FINGERED, FINGERED ON BASS, and AI FINGERED, if you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm instruments will continue playing (Chord Cancel function). This let you play back only the rhythm. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based on the root and the fifth. • The auto accompaniment Style will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • You can also have the PSR-A1000 “teach” you how to play Fingered chords. From the CHORD FINGERING display (page 123), specify the chord you want to learn, and the notes you should press are indicated in the display. C7sus4 * Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion. 60 ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) ) ( Chord Name [Abbreviation] Major seventh ninth Csus2 ( ) 11 ( C7 C7 13 C7 9 ) ) ( ) ( C7 9 ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm Styles Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) The PSR-A1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Areas that allow you to vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professionalsounding arrangement in your performance. 1 2 Select a style (page 56). 2-1 Turn the ACMP function on. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN BREAK SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. INTRO AUTO FILL IN 2-3 2-2 3 SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Turn the SYNC. START function on. Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again. The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section. Split point Auto Accompaniment area 4 Main sections can be shifted. STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN Press this button to add breaks. FADE IN/OUT SYNC. START START/STOP You can also use this function to play only rhythms (page 58). • If you press the [INTRO] button, you can play back an Intro section while an accompaniment is playing. • Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons LED is green — The section is not selected. LED is red — The section is currently selected. LED is off — No section data; the section cannot be played. • You can dynamically control the level of the accompaniment by how softly or strongly you play the keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard (page 122). • If you press the [SYNC. START] button while an accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop and the PSRA1000 will enter Synchronized Start standby status. • You can also change style sections by using the pedal (page 123). • The Break section lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. If you press the [BREAK] button while an accompaniment is playing, the fill-in will play back for one measure. • The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A/ B/C/D) will flash while the Break is playing. • When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and the MAIN [A][B] [C][D] button is pressed after the final half beat (eighth note) of the measure, the fill-in will begin from the next measure. PSR-A1000 61 Styles This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the Style stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. 5 STYLE CONTROL BREAK ACMP MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Fade-in/Fade-out The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in before starting the style, press the button again. To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 132). Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, style playback will stop completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard are released. Style playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment area is played. 1 Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on. 2 Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when SYNC. STOP is turned on. STYLE CONTROL BREAK ACMP MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN 3 SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT • Styles can also be started by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. • You can select the Intro and Ending type by pressing the [E] button in the MAIN window (page 63). • If you press the [INTRO] button while the ending is playing, the Intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished. • When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and you press a MAIN button while the ending is playing, fill-in accompaniment will immediately start playing, continuing with the Main section. • You can begin the accompaniment by using the Ending instead of the Intro section. In this case, the auto accompaniment doesn’t stop when the ending is finished. • If you select a different style while the style is not playing, the “default” tempo for that style is also selected. If the style is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style. • When STOP ACMP is set to on and the accompaniment is not playing, you can play both chords and bass in the Auto Accompaniment area in the keyboard (page 122). As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. Split point You can also use the SYNC. STOP function by pressing the auto accompaniment area/left-hand range briefly (page 122). Auto Accompaniment area 62 4 The style stops when you release your left hand from the keys. 5 Playing a chord with your left hand automatically restarts the style. PSR-A1000 END Press the [SYNC. STOP]/ [SYNC. START] button again to stop the style. Synchro Stop cannot be set to on when the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard/AI Full Keyboard or the auto accompaniment on the panel is set to off. Styles Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) 1 To call up the [MAIN] display, first press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button. A B C D E 2 3 D E Select a Intro Play the style using the Intro or Ending section (page 30, 31). Select a Ending Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In 1 2 STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play (page 30, 31). Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections. END Fill A short phrase used to add variation to the style. To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again. You can also add a fill-in by pressing the selected MAIN button again. You can temporarily disable Auto Fill In during a performance by pressing the next Main section’s button twice quickly. PSR-A1000 63 The Multi Pads The PSR-A1000 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances. Multi Pads Playing the Multi Pads 1 2 Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display (page 35). Press any of the Multi Pads. STOP MULTI PAD The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed. The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the phrase : • To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button. • To stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the pad or pads you wish to stop. • Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set tempo. • You can even play two, three, or four Multi Pads at the same time. • Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the top again. Chord Match 1 2 Turn ACMP on (page 57). Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads. Split Point The Chord Match on/off status depends on the selected Multi Pad Bank. Auto Accompaniment area STOP MULTI PAD In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back. Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back. 64 PSR-A1000 The Multi Pad Multi Pad Edit This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another. Select the desired Multi Pad(s). Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 35) A F B G C H D I E J The same as the Open/Save display on pages 38 and 41. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calls up the upper level directory page. 8 PSR-A1000 65 Song Playback Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 83), and commercially available song data. You can use this highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song. You can also display the lyrics in the LCD. SONG EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REPEAT REW METRONOME FF SYNC. START Compatible Song Types Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General MIDI). Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG format. XG is a significant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard, providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect sections and effect types. Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) format. Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s original MIDI file format. 66 PSR-A1000 Commercially available music data is subject to copyright restrictions, and is intended only for your own personal use. For more information on the song file types compatible with the PSR-A1000, see page 143. Song Playback Song Playback Playing the Internal Songs 1 BACK NEXT If the MAIN screen (at left) is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. A F B G C H D I E J 2 2-1 2-2 Open a folder and select a song to be played back. 3 The song starts. SONG EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) You can also make a variety of other settings (such as tempo, voice selection, etc.) and have them automatically called up when you play back the song (page 95). BACK Select the PRESET tab with the [BACK] button. NEXT You can enable the Synchro Start for the song by simultaneously pressing the [TOP] button and the SONG [START/STOP] button. The song starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also use this function along with the Style’s Synchro Start function (page 57). A F B G n C H You can have the volume automatically fade in and fade out at the beginning and end of the song. Simply press the [FADEIN/OUT] button at the start of song playback to fade in the song, and press it again at the end of the song to fade out. D I E J END TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC n TOP START/STOP REPEAT REW METRONOME FF START/STOP To stop the song immediately, press the button again. EXIT NEW SONG SYNC. START Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 47) or the [TAP TEMPO] button. You can even change the playback speed by tapping out the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice. Songs can also be played back continuously. Set SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON from the SONG SETTING display (page 121). Press the button in order to go back to the previous screen. Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 135) is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back. PSR-A1000 67 Song Playback Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of the song’s chord data. • [ACMP] button .................. ...ON • [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON 1 2 3 4 Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Select the desired accompaniment style. Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE section buttons.) Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections. END The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped. Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback. 68 PSR-A1000 The accompaniment stops when you stop the song. If the accompaniment style is playing and you start the song, the accompaniment automatically stops. However, for internal songs that use accompaniment styles, the accompaniment style is not stopped. Song Playback Playing Back Songs on Disk Before proceeding, make sure to read the section “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk” (page 7). Insert the disk into the drive. n Insert the disk shutter side first and label face up. The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions (page 67), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display. Other Playback-related Operations ■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped, pressing this button returns the song to the beginning. REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REW FF SYNC. START Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button. SONG POSITION display When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. You can set whether or not the PSR-A1000 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted (page 134). n Some song data for the PSR-A1000 has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. During playback of such song data, the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of the song has been played back. n Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200– 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data. “PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the [J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark. ■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels BALANCE Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 58). CHANNEL ON/OFF Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below). PART CHANNEL ON/OFF display Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press that channel’s button again. Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data. The channels are assigned as shown below for the PSR-A1000. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 PSR-A1000 69 Song Playback Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play that part yourself. 1 Select the song to be played back (page 66). You can change the channel assignments for Track 1 and Track 2 (page 121), letting you specify which parts are muted when pressing the [TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/ [EXTRA TRACKS] buttons. Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts (all but the right hand/left hand). 2 SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) METRONOME REPEAT Use this button to turn on/off the right-hand part. All tracks are automatically set to on when selecting a different song. Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part. Start the song. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ 3 REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REW ][ ] buttons (page 47). END START/STOP FF To stop the song, press the button again. SYNC. START Repeat Playback of a Specific Range This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly. 1 Play back the song (page 67, 69). 2 SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REPEAT You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again. METRONOME Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to start (Point A). Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to end (Point B). Point B cannot be selected unless Point A has been selected first. n 3 4 After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly. Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP] button returns to point A. Stop the song. START/STOP END REPEAT To cancel the Repeat function, press the button again. 70 PSR-A1000 Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the song. n The specified A and B points will be erased when selecting a different song number, cancelling the Repeat function, or selecting a different repeat mode — such as Phrase Repeat or repeat in Song Chain Play (page 118). Song Playback Displaying the Lyrics This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your performance or song playback. 1 Select the desired song (page 67, 69). 2 A B C D E 3 If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. In this example, select “Lyrics” in the Function folder of the PRESET (SONG) page. If the selected song contains chord data, chord names are displayed with the lyrics. 4 SONG Start the song. EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC TOP NEW SONG 5 The lyrics are in reverse display along with song playback. END SONG EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) START/STOP TRACK 1 (L) (R) NEW SONG METRONOME REW FF SYNC. START TRACK 2 REC REPEAT TOP START/STOP REPEAT METRONOME REW The lyrics can be changed (page 98). FF SYNC. START Stop the song. To return to the previous page, press the button. EXIT PSR-A1000 71 Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily raise or lower the pitches of specific notes and create your own scales. You can change the scale settings at any time — even when you are playing. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them. Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). You can easily change the scale setting at any time by pressing one of the [SCALE SETTING] buttons, located at the left side of the panel. Pressing each button turns the Scale Setting feature for the specific note on and off. The Scale Setting feature affects all the notes having the same note name in all octaves. When set to on (the selected button itself is lit), you can play the keyboard in the selected oriental scale. The scale setting for each note is -50 cents. You can also adjust the scale tuning in 1-cent units in the SCALE TUNE display. The [SCALE SETTING] buttons will light or go out according to the song playback data. The Scale Setting function has no effect on the Drum Kit/SFX Kit voices. Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning You can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale notes. Press the [SCALE TUNING] button located at the right side of display to call up the SCALE TUNE display. Selects which parts should be affected by the scale setting. Select the part to be set by pressing 6 or 7 [▲/▼] and set the function ON or OFF by pressing [8▲/▼]. Selects the desired scale template. BAYAT and RAST are two typical oriental scale settings. Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. 72 PSR-A1000 1 2 3 Selects the note to be tuned. 4 Adjusts the scale tuning of the selected note. [4▲/▼] : in 50-cent steps [5▲/▼] : in 1-cent steps (–64 through 5 6 7 8 +63) Press the 4 or 5 [▲/▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting. When you adjust the scale tuning, the scale template name shown at the top of the display will change to “EDITED SCALE” indicating some adjustment has been done from the preset scale template. The [SCALE SETTING] buttons will light when the tuning values of the corresponding notes are set to something other than “0”. Also, the values you set by using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons are automatically reflected in the SCALE TUNE display. Cent A unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone). n You can register your original scale tunings to a REGISTRATION MEMORY button. To do this, checkmark “SCALE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display (page 76). Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory Scale ■ Equal Temperament The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. ■ Bayat/Rast Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. ■ Pure Major/Pure Minor These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing. ■ Pythagorean This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. ■ Mean-Tone This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. ■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C) The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument. C C D E E F F G A A B B Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Bayat 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 Rast 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2 Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2 Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7 PSR-A1000 73 Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory The scale settings you set (using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display) are memorized by the Scale Memory function. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them. 1 Set up the scale settings as desired using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display. 2 While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. Any data that was previously in the selected location is erased and replaced by the new settings. The memorized scale settings here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation (see next section). Saving Your Scale Settings The scale settings memorized to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons are saved as a single file. BANK 01 All settings memorized to the buttons [1]–[6] are referred to as a “bank.” The banks can be saved to “USER” or “FLOPPY DISK” as Scale Tune Bank files. 1 F G H I J 74 PSR-A1000 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and [EXIT] button to call up the MAIN display. Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory 2 Save the settings you’ve made to the SCALE MEMORY buttons as a single Scale Tune Bank file (page 41). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The SCALE TUNE EDIT display appears. For details on this display, see below. SCALE TUNE EDIT display The contents of the current Scale Tune Bank are listed in the SCALE TUNE EDIT screen. The names of the stored Scale Settings are shown in the display. From this screen, you can select, name, or delete each of the Scale Settings. Select..... Press the [A]–[C]/[F]–[H] buttons. The SCALE TUNE EDIT display is linked to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons. When you select the Scale Settings in the display, the corresponding SCALE MEMORY button lights. Name .... This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 38) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” Delete.... This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 40) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the SCALE TUNE BANK display by pressing the [8] (▲) button and save the data (page 41). Recalling the Scale Setting To recall the memorized scale settings, select the desired bank in the SCALE TUNE BANK display (page 72). Press the appropriate SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] button to which you memorized the setting. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. The Scale Memory function can be turned off by pressing the SCALE MEMORY button which is currently lit, so that the light goes out. The default Equal Temperament Scale settings (pitch settings for all notes are “0” will be restored. If you press a SCALE MEMORY button to which nothing is memorized, the current scale settings remain and nothing changes. PSR-A1000 75 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR-A1000 just as you want — selecting specific voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you. 1 Set up the panel controls as desired. For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart). Keep in mind that songs or styles on disk cannot registered to Registration Memory. If you want to register a disk-based song or style, copy the relevant data to “USER” in the SONG/STYLE display (page 35) and register the data separately. REGISTRATION MEMORY 2 FREEZE MEMORY 3 Cancels the registration and returns to the MAIN display. You can also use the [EXIT] button. F Select the desired parameter groups for the settings you want to register. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to navigate in this display. To register a parameter group, checkmark the corresponding box. Groups left without checkmarks will not be included in the Registration Memory setting. This allows you to maintain certain settings, even when switching among Registration Memory presets. You can also use the Freeze function (page 78) to override the Registration Memory changes — letting you prevent certain panel settings from being changed. E Press the desired ND number button for registering the settings. G H I J Enters a checkmark to the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Removes the checkmark from the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Indicator is green .....The panel setting is registered, but not selected. Indicator is red .........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected. Indicator is off..........The panel setting is not registered. The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation explained on the next page. 76 PSR-A1000 Any data that was previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button (indicator is green or red) will be erased and replaced by the new settings. Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Saving Your Registration Memory Setups The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single file. All settings registered to buttons [1][8] are referred to as a “bank.” The banks can be saved to “USER” or “FLOPPY DISK” as Registration bank files. BANK 01 Keep in mind that the size of the Registration bank files and the memory space they occupy depends on the amount of functions set in each. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and [EXIT] button to call up the MAIN display. 1 F G H I J 2 Save the settings you’ve made to the Registration Memory buttons as a single Registration bank file (page 41). The REGISTRATION EDIT display appears. For details on this display, see below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION EDIT display The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green. From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets. Select ..........Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8] buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on (indicator is red). Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 38) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” Delete .........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 40) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION BANK display by pressing the [8▼] (UP) button and save the data (page 41). PSR-A1000 77 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Recalling a Registration Memory Setup You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you specifically want or need. For example, if you de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you change the Registration Memory preset. Recalling the Registered Settings Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 77). Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings. You can program your Registration Memory presets to be called up in sequence, in any order you desire. Once programmed, the presets 1 - 8 can be selected in sequence with the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal (page 126). REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Selecting the Freeze Settings 1 2 MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION Call up the “FREEZE” page from the REGIST.SEQUENCE/ FREEZE/VOICE SET screen (page 126). Enters a checkmark to the selected box. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Removes the checkmark from the selected box. Select the Freeze settings. 3 Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specified in the Freeze page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE 4 MEMORY Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE 78 PSR-A1000 MEMORY Editing Voices — Sound Creator The PSR-A1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can save it as a USER voice for future recall. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR • The Voice can be edited in realtime while playing back a song/style. • Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the original settings of the voice. Operation 1 Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the voice you wish to edit. 2 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR F G H DIGITAL RECORDING I J MIXING CONSOLE The voice can also be selected in the SOUND CREATOR display. CAUTION The settings are lost if the edited part's voice is switched to another voice. Important data should be saved to User Drive or floppy disk. PART 3 Edit the voice parameters. The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail starting on page 81. Select the desired menu by pressing the [NEXT]/ [BACK] button. Indicates the parameters available for editing in this display. These correspond to the parameters/values shown at the bottom of the display. Can be used during editing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited voice. Select the desired menu. The selected menu is highlighted. 4 Save the edited voice to the USER drive (Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 41). Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving the edited voice as a User voice (page 41). 5 Press the [USER] button to select the edited voice, and play the keyboard. PSR-A1000 79 Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR- Sound Creator Parameters COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave. SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice. EFFECT Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings. HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings. Keep in mind that there are certain parameters whose Sound Creator settings affect only the Main part’s voice. The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display. Common parameter Other location MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 55 PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 114 FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 114 FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 114 REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115 CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115 DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 54 DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115 DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 55,115 HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 COMMON The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79. Set the volume of the current edited voice. Determines the touch sensitivity, or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. 0 —–– Produces more dramatic level drops, the more softly you play. 64 —– Normal response. 127 — Produces high volume for any playing strength (fixed) 80 PSR-A1000 Set the portamento time of each part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE) (page 114). This determines whether the voice is played monophonically (page 55). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Shift the octave range of the selected voice up or down in octaves. When the Main or Layer part’s voice is used, the M/LYR parameter is available; when the Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT parameter is available. Editing the voice -SOUND CREATORSOUND The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Determines the filter, EG, and vibrato settings (see below). 8 ■ FILTER FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. • BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency (resonance) range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. • Harmonic Content Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency, set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects. Frequency (pitch) Cutoff range Volume Resonance Resonance Frequency (pitch) ■ EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. • ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The higher the value, the slower the attack. Level • DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher the value, the slower the decay. ATTACK Key on • RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release. DECAY RELEASE Time Key off If RELEASE is set to a large value, the sustain becomes long. PSR-A1000 81 Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR■ VIBRATO • DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. VIBRATO Creates a wavering in the sound by periodically changing the pitch. • SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). • DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset. SPEED Level DEPTH DELAY Time EFFECT The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79. Determines the DSP type. For information on the effect structure, see page 117; for a list of available effect types, refer to the separate Data List. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The same as the “Mixing Console” on page 115. Determines the Sustain depth of each voice when the [SUSTAIN] button is set to on. HARMONY The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79. The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 128. 82 PSR-A1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 84), which lets you record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 85), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording (page 87), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song can be stored to internal memory or floppy disk (page 35, 41). SONG DIGITAL RECORDING EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REPEAT REW METRONOME FF SYNC. START About Song Recording ■ Quick Recording (page 84) This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano song you are practicing. You can select from four parts: right hand, left hand and auto accompaniment/multi pad. For example, you can record only your right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right hand and the auto accompaniment. ■ Multi Recording (page 85) This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance. ■ Step Recording (page 87) This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play. ■ Song Editing (page 93) The PSR-A1000 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods. • The internal memory capacity of the PSR-A1000 is about 260KB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1.44MB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PSR-A1000 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together. • Songs recorded on the PSRA1000 are automatically recorded as SMF (Standard MIDI File format 0) data. For details on SMF, see page 143. • Playback of the recorded song data can be transmitted from MIDI OUT, letting you play the sounds of a connected external tone generator (page 130). • The volume level of each channel of the song can be adjusted from the Mixing Console and the settings can be saved. Moreover, even after you’ve set a voice for your keyboard play during recording, you can record voice selections, so that the voice changes automatically during playback (page 95). PSR-A1000 83 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Quick Recording This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so you can check your progress. ■ When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance: ■ When creating a new song: 1 REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REW FF 1 SYNC. START Select the desired song (page 67, 69). 2 Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song. If you want to record to the MAIN/Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [MAIN]/[LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON. Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well. 3 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button corresponding to the track you want to record. You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the same time. To record your keyboard performance: Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button. To record the auto accompaniment and multi pad performance: Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. REC EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. 4 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 123). END To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again. Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 123). ■ Play back your new song To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 96). Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 35, 41). 84 PSR-A1000 If the "LAYER" or "LEFT" button is on before pressing the REC button, the corresponding Layer and Left parts are automatically recorded to different channels. The performance of track 1/2 is recorded to the channel specified in the SONG SETTING display (page 121). You can overdub a second right-hand performance onto Track 2 after recording the first right-hand performance (including the layer voices) on Track 1. To do this, set the [LEFT] button to OFF and repeat steps 2 and 3. To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. You can also use the metronome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded. CAUTION Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance. If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 35, 41). Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Multi Recording This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below. Channels Parts (default settings) 1 Voice MAIN 2 Voice MAIN 3 Voice MAIN 4 Voice MAIN 5 Voice MAIN 6 Voice MAIN 7 Voice MAIN 8 Voice MAIN Available parts Channels Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Multi Pad1 Multi Pad2 Multi Pad3 Multi Pad4 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parts (default settings) Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 Available parts Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Multi Pad1 Multi Pad2 Multi Pad3 Multi Pad4 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI About the accompaniment style parts Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used. Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others. Chord ........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices. Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir. Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. ■ When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance: ■ When creating a new song: 1 REC NEW SONG 2 TOP START/STOP REW FF 1 SYNC. START Select the desired song (page 67, 69). Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] [8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time. REC ......................... Enables recording for the channel ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel OFF......................... Mutes the channel To cancel or disable REC recording, press the [REC] button once again. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The part is automatically selected when setting the several channels to “REC” at the same time. 8 PSR-A1000 85 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 3 Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded. This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the recording channels selected in step #2. For a list of the initial default assignments, see page 85. C D 4 5 6 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The recording can be started/stopped by pressing the foot pedal if the recording punch in/out function is set to the pedal (page 92). To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. You can also use the foot pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 92). When selecting the MIDI part • Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1 - 16 is recorded. When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device. • Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this records data only over the set MIDI channel — meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel. A single part (with the exception of MIDI parts) cannot be assigned to several channels. The settings of the recorded parts is stored temporarily until you execute Quick Recording, select a song, or turn the power off. To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. Play back your new song. To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. You can also use the metronome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded. CAUTION END 86 PSR-A1000 To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above. You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a finished song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 96). Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 35, 41). Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance. If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 35, 41). Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Individual Notes — Step Record This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately. Operation 1 Select an existing song (page 67, 69) to which you want to add parts or re-record. If you want to create a new song, simultaneously press the [RECORD] button and the [TOP] button. 3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display. A 2 B Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR C D E DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons, select the “1 -16” tab for recording melodies and other parts, or select the “CHD” (Chord) tab for recording chords, and after selecting the “1 - 16” tab, select a record channel with the [F] (CH) button. BACK NEXT F G H I J 5 Call up the Step Record display by pressing the [G] button. F Any voice, effect and other settings you make in the Mixing Console are automatically cancelled when you call up the CHD (Chord) page. G H I J The voices in the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages cannot be selected for Step recording. You can select voices from the PRESET page; however, these may sound slightly different from the original voice. PSR-A1000 87 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 6 First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, first specify the length and loudness in this display, then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard. Moves the cursor position up and down. Returns the cursor to the beginning of the song (the first note of the first measure). Use these to move the selected event, in units of measures (BAR), beat, and clocks. For information on measure/beat/clock settings, see below. END A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Specifies the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth notes are available only when recording the melody.) This also determines the position to which the pointer will advance after a note has been entered. Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered (only when recording the melody). For information on velocity settings, see below. Determines the length of the note (as a percentage) from the position at which it is to be entered. (This is available only when recording the melody.) For information on gate time settings, see below. Each press of this button toggles among the three basic note selectors at the bottom of the display: normal, dotted, and triplet. (This is available only when recording the melody.) 8 Deletes the event at the cursor. To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 41). ■ Measure/Beat/Clock Measure 1 Beat Clock 1 2 2 3 4 1 000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919 2 3 4 000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919 ■ Velocity The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values. Kbd. Vel Actual playing strength fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15 ■ Gate Time The following settings are available: Normal ....................... 80% Tenuto ........................ 99% Staccato...................... 40% Staccatissimo .............. 20% Manual ....................... The gate time (note length) can be specified as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. 88 PSR-A1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording by guiding you through this actual music example, shown at right. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 88. 1 1-1 1-2 Select this note. 1-3 2 While holding down this note... ...press this (to input a tie). 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-1 Select this note. 3 3-1 Press this button to display the dotted notes. 3-3 3-2 Select this note. 4 4-1 Call up the normal notes by pressing this button. 4-3 4-2 Select this note. To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note. ■ Play back the newly created melody Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 96). PSR-A1000 89 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 88. Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below. MAIN A C 1 BREAK F G F MAIN B G7 Enter the chords by using the currently selected chord fingering method in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. C Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right. MAIN A C MAIN F C 001:1:000 F Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. 2 G 001:3:000 G 002:1:000 Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right. MAIN A C BREAK F G F BREAK 002:3:000 INTRO G7 002:4:000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. 90 PSR-A1000 F G7 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 3 Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right. MAIN A BREAK MAIN B MAIN C F G F G7 C C 003:1:000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. ■ Play back the newly created chord progression Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display (page 97). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data. To enter a fill-in, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button and press one of the MAIN [A]– [D] buttons. END Mark An “END” mark is shown in the display, indicating the end of the song data. The actual position of the End mark differs depending on the section that is input at the end of the song. When an Ending section is input, the End mark automatically follows the Ending data. When a section other than Ending is input, the End mark is set two measures after the final section. The End mark can be freely set to any position desired. PSR-A1000 91 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording. To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation steps 1 - 3 on page 87. These settings determine how recording will start. Normal Pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button enables Synchro standby and overwrite recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. F G Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. H I First Key On Overwrite recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This setting also preserves the previous lead-in data, letting you record over the original lead-in without erasing it. J Determines the Punch Out measure — the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording stops (when “PUNCH OUT AT” is selected). Punch In At The song plays back normally up to the indicated Punch In measure (set by the [3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite recording at that Punch In measure. 1 Determines the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording starts (when “PUNCH IN AT” is selected). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data. Replace All This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped. Punch Out This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped. When this is set to ON, you can use the foot pedal 2 to control the punch-in and punch-out points. (The current function assignment of the foot pedal is cancelled.) Press and hold down the foot pedal to record. Recording stops when you release the pedal. Punch Out At Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons), then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally. About Punch In/Out This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. REC START setting REC END setting NORMAL REPLACE ALL NORMAL PUNCH OUT NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006 PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006 92 PSR-A1000 Original data 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 1 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 8 5 *1 When measures 1 - 2 are not overwritten, recording starts from measure 3. *2 You’ll have to press the [REC] button at the end of 5 measures. Deleted 5 6 7 8 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start/start overwrite recording *1 Start/ play back original data 7 Stop recording *2 Start/start overwrite recording *1 1 6 Stop recording *2 Start/start overwrite recording *1 1 5 2 3 4 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 Deleted Stop recording *2 4 5 6 7 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording 2 Deleted Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 6 Stop recording *2 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 5 4 5 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing a Recorded Song Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing features to change the song data. Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons. Quantize Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values. Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specified note value (see below). Use this to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Quantize operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Quantize results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats only by the specified amount. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. Selects the quantize size (resolution). See the below for the details. Selects the desired channel to be quantized. ■ About Quantize Size Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4 note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes. One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization Quantize Size 1/4 note 1/4 note triplet 1/8 note 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note 1/16 note triplet 1/32 note 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note + 1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note + 1/16 note triplet * The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. PSR-A1000 93 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Delete This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Deletes all data in the selected channel. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. These select the channel to be deleted. 8 Mix This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Mix operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Mix results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 These let you specify the two source channels to be mixed. 4 5 6 7 PSR-A1000 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 8 Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. If “COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the Destination channel. 94 All data other than the mixed note data is derived from the Source 1 channel. Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Channel Transpose This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Channel Transpose operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Channel Transpose results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16. To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel. Set Up You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing console or panel controls. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the SET UP operation. Once SET UP has been executed, the operation cannot be cancelled or undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Use this to checkmark the selected item. Checkmarked items are stored with the song. Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song. Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button, and stop playback. Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song. Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE) button. PSR-A1000 95 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing Note Events — 1 - 16 From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. Use these to move the cursor up/down and select the desired event. Determines the channel to be edited. A F Returns to the beginning position of the current song (the first note of the first measure). B G C H D I Use these to move the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the highlighted event. Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from the justedited value automatically enters that value. E J Calls up the Step Recording display (page 88). Calls up the Filter display (page 98), letting you select only the events you wish to shown in the Event List. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Holding this button down while using the [A] and [B] buttons lets you select multiple events. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pastes all cut or copied events to the selected location. Determines the current position of the event being edited. For coarse adjustment of the event value. For fine adjustment of the event value. Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events are copied and can be pasted to another location. Adds a new event to the Event List. If the value at the cursor has been changed, pressing this restores the original value. Copies all selected events. The copied events can be pasted to another location. Deletes the event at the cursor position. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Note Events Parameter Note Ctrl (Control change) Prog (Program change) P.Bnd (Pitch bend) A.T. (After touch) Description Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note. Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to the separate Data List booklet (Voice List). Determines the pitch bend value. Determines the after touch value. The sound of the voices recorded with Step recording may sound slightly different from the original. 96 PSR-A1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing Chord Events — CHD From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 96). A F B G C H D I E J Press this to convert the recorded chord and section entries into song data. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Chord Events Parameter Style (Accompaniment style) Tempo Chord Sect (Section) OnOff (Channel on/off) CH.Vol (Channel volume) S.Vol (Style volume) Description Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select the desired style. Determines the tempo value. Specifies the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note. Specifies the section — its name and variation. Determines whether specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off. Determines the level of specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.). Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style. Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) From this display, you can edit recorded System events. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 96). System Events Parameter Description ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display. Only one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature. Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting. XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data; however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data; however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. PSR-A1000 97 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Inputting and Editing Lyrics This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 96). In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on pages 67 and 71. 1 Move the cursor to the event containing the lyric “star.” 2 Move the cursor to the word “star.” 3 Use these buttons to call up the Lyric display, from which you can input lyrics. From the Lyric display (page 42), enter the new word, “(your name).” A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Press this button to save the newly changed lyric data. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. 8 Lyrics Events Parameter Description Name (Song name) Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name. Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics. Code (Other controls) CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics. Customizing the Event List — Filter This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list, remove the checkmark so that the box is empty. To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or LYRICS (page 96 - page 98). Calls up the Main Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Calls up the Control Change Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). A F B G C H D I E J 1 END Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. 98 PSR-A1000 Selects only note data; checkmarks for all other boxes are removed. Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously un-checked and vice versa. Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). EXIT Enters checkmarks for all items. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected item. Selects the item, scrolling up/ down one item at a time. When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER” is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time. Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just as with the preset styles. DIGITAL RECORDING STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN ENDING / rit. INTRO SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT About Creating Accompaniment Styles The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create. Section Channel INTRO A - D MAIN A - D ■ Realtime Recording (page 101) FILL IN A - D You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself — you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your own custom style. BREAK RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2 ENDING A - D For information on the part structure of accompaniment styles, see page 85. Realtime Recording Characteristics • Loop recording Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded. • Overdub recording This feature lets you record new material to a track already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specifically delete it yourself. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new material while hearing the previous parts. ■ Step Recording (page 102) This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play. ■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 103) This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8 Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one accompaniment style. 8Beat 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 60’s 8 Beat Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Chord 2 8Beat 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 ■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 104) With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles. PSR-A1000 99 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Style File Format These are the patterns recorded to the accompaniment styles (page 107). Source Pattern The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. By using the edit functions, you can take full advantage of the SFF format and freely create your own styles. The chart at right indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm tracks.)The basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the original style data. This source pattern is recorded using accompaniment style recording (see below). As shown in the chart at right, the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter settings and chord changes (played in Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard) entered to this source pattern. 1 Source Root (root note of basic chord) 2 Source Chord (type of basic chord) Chord changes (in Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard) Pitch Conversion 3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) 4 NTT (Note Transposition Table) This data is created by chords played in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard (page 59). These settings are edited from the PARAMETER display. These parameters determine how the pitch of the source pattern is converted when you play chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. Other Settings 5 High Key (threshold of the pitch conversion) 6 Note Limit (soundable range) 7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of the chord change) Output Operation 1 Select the desired accompaniment style for editing. To record a new accompaniment style from scratch, call up the BASIC page in the Style Creator display and select “New Style” by pressing the [C] button. 3 A B C D 2 E DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page. BACK F G NEXT Use the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons to select the various pages. 5 Call up the Style display by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (in Assembly page: [J] button), then save the recorded / edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page. H I J 100 PSR-A1000 END Press the [EXIT] button to close the STYLE CREATOR display. Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Realtime Recording — Basic You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. 1 Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button. Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC page” on page 102) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button. Calls up the display for changing the tempo or beat (time signature). Selects an empty style, allowing you to create a new style from scratch. A B C D E Available only when the channel is set to [RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete specific percussion sounds during recording. Simultaneously hold down this button and press the key corresponding to the instrument you want to delete. When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over channels containing data. To delete data from a specific channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button. To release or cancel the selection, press the [1▼] [8▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to cancel. As long as you continue to hold down the F [J] button, you can toggle G between deleting and restoring the selected data. H Releasing the [J] button I permanently deletes the data. Before recording to J one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. REC .... Channel is enabled for recording. ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback. OFF .... Channel is muted. 2 First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/ STOP] button. The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the percussion instruments assigned to the keys. 3 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again. END With the REC CHANNEL display shown, close the display by pressing the [EXIT] button. If you’ve enabled Sync Start (by pressing the SYNC. START button), you can start recording by simply pressing a key on the keyboard. • Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected for the RHY 2 channel. • For the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), allvoices with the exception of the Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected. PSR-A1000 101 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Other Parameters in the Basic Display [I] (SAVE) button Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data. [3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons Determines the section to be recorded. [5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill In/Break section is fixed at a length of one measure. [D] (Execute) button Executes the Pattern Length change. You can also select the desired section for recording by pressing appropriate panel button. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display, from which you can change sections by using the [6▲▼]/ [7▲▼] buttons. To actually enter the change, press the [8▲] button.To select the Fill In section, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button. Recording — Precautions • The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord. All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source C R C C R C chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of C = chord note CM7), keep the following points in mind: C, R = recommended note * When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.) * When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.) The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 107. • When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to “HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINOR” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts. Step Recording With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. F G H I J The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 87), with the exception of the points described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 96). • In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen. • When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change, etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.). Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 100) beforehand. 102 PSR-A1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns — from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. 1 These let you select the accompaniment style that will be used for each channel of your original style. Select the desired channel by pressing the [A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same button to call up the Style screen, from which you can select the accompaniment style. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 After repeating steps 1 and 2 as desired, press the [J] (SAVE) button to save the assembled style data. From here, you can store the settings of all channels (RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, etc.) to a single accompaniment style. 8 Selects the style section and channel that will be copied to the corresponding channels, selected with the [A]-[D] and [F]-[I] buttons above. Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and channel that will be copied are playing. SOLO ............Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display (page 102) are played back simultaneously. ON ................Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 101) are played back simultaneously. OFF ...............If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 101), OFF does not appear and is not available. If you change the section and channel in steps #1 and #2, the currently specified section and channel are also changed. The channels being recorded are also changed and recording is stopped automatically. The PLAY TYPE parameter affects only the playback, and does not change the actual accompaniment style data. PSR-A1000 103 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Edit the Created Accompaniment Style Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. ■ Groove Use these to select the desired edit operation. A F B G C H D I E J Executes the Groove operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Groove results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data. Determines the settings for each of the Groove parameters (see the list below). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Groove parameters 104 Original Beat Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat —but not including the first beat — will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. PSR-A1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator ■ Dynamics Use these to select the desired edit operation. A F B G C H D I E J Executes the Dynamics operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. 1 2 3 Select the desired channel to which Dynamics is to be applied. 4 5 6 7 Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data. 8 Determines the settings for each of the Dynamics parameters (see the list below). Dynamics parameters Accent Type Selects the type of accent. Strength Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard. The more strongly you play the keyboard, the higher the velocity value and, hence, the louder the sound. PSR-A1000 105 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Editing the Channel Data In this display, there are five different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. See the explanations below. Preset channel BASSPHRASE 2 can not be edited. ■ Quantize Refer to page 93. ■ Velocity Change Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL) buttons), according to the specified percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons). ■ Bar Copy This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. ■ Bar Clear This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared. ■ Remove Event This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons to select the desired event type to be removed. 106 PSR-A1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 100. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 100. When NTR is set to “Root Fixed” and NTT is set to “Bypass,” the “Source Root” and “Source Chord” parameters are changed to “Play Root” and “Play Chord,” respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels. See the explanations below. ■ Source Root/Chord These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 102. When the Source Root is C: C6 CMaj CM711 CM7 CM79 C9 C69 C C R C C R C R C C C R Cm Caug R C R Cm711 C R C C7 5 C C C C C C C C R C R C R C C C C C C C1+5 C C C C R C C C C C R C C C C R C C C C C C R C C C C C C R C C C R C C C= chord note C, R = recommended note R C C C R C C C C79 Csus2 Csus4 C R C C7sus4 C713 C C C R C R C C R R C C C C C7 C C C R C Cm79 C C C79 C C R C C R C R C R C C R R C C R R C C C Cm9 C C713 C C R C C R Cdim7 C R C C1+8 C7aug CM7aug C C C R C Cdim C711 C79 C R C C C C C C C Cm75 C R C C CmM79 R C C R C Cm7 C R C C R C C C R C C C CmM7 C C R C R C Cm6 C R C R C C R C C R ■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table) • NTR (Note Transposition Rule) This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available. Root Trans (Root Transpose) When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. Root Fixed The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. PSR-A1000 107 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator • NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available. Bypass No transposition. Melody Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Chord Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. Bass Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes onbass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines. Melodic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Harmonic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. ■ High Key/Note Limit • High Key This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the octave just below the highest key. This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (page 107) is set to “Root Trans.” • Note Limit This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sound). The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range. Example — When the highest key is F Root changes CM CM Notes played C3-E3-G3 C 3-F3-G 3 FM F3-A3-C4 FM F 2-A 2-C 3 Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 Root changes CM CM FM 3-C4 E3-G3-C4 F3-G F3-A3-C4 Notes played High Limit Low Limit ■ RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. Stop The notes stop sounding. Pitch Shift The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. Pitch Shift to Root The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. Retrigger The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. Retrigger To Root The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. 108 PSR-A1000 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator The PSR-A1000 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases — which you can use in your performances in the same way as the preset Multi Pads. STOP MULTI PAD Operation 1 Select the desired Multi Pad Bank for editing. To record a new Multi Pad from scratch, call up the RECORD page in the Multi Pad Creator display and select “New Bank” by pressing the [C] (NEW BANK) button. 3 A B C D 2 DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR E DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Record and Edit the Multi Pad. For details on the operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page. BACK F G H NEXT Use the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons to select the RECORD or EDIT page. 5 Call up the Multi Pad display by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button, then save the recorded / edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page. I J END Press the [EXIT] button to close the MULTI PAD display. PSR-A1000 109 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109. Select the desired Multi Pad for recording or editing. You can also select it by pressing the MULTI PAD [1] to [4] button. A F B G C H D I E J Select this to engage the Record standby mode (synchronized standby). Select this to save the recorded pad data to USER or FLOPPY DISK drive. Selects an empty Multi Pad bank, allowing you to create a new Multi Pad from scratch. Calls up the NAME display to input the new name. Turn Repeat/Chord Match of each pad on or off (see below). Start recording First, select the desired voice. Press the [H] (REC) button to set the Record standby mode. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the STYLE [START] button. If Chord Match (see below) is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B). C R C C R C C = chord note C, R = recommended note Others: non-recommended note • Other notes besides those of the C major seventh scale can be recorded; however, this may result in the recorded phrase not matching the chord when being played back. • The rhythm part of the currently selected style is used as a rhythmic guide (in place of a metronome), playing back during recording. However, it is not recorded to the Multi Pad. Stop recording Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel STYLE/MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop recording when you've finished playing the phrase. Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off ■ Repeat Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button. ■ Chord Match If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords. 110 PSR-A1000 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit With this method, you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109. F F G G H H I I J J The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 87), with the exception of the points described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 96). • Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback. • Since the Multi Pads have only one track (channel), the track (channel) cannot be changed. PSR-A1000 111 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound. Mixing Console This set of controls lets you adjust the balance of the voices and their stereo position, as well as the amount of effect that is applied to each voice. MIXING CONSOLE PART You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button (page 58). Operation MIXING CONSOLE 1 PART From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the button switches among the displays listed below. PANEL PART Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/ Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song. STYLE PART Accompaniment parts SONG CH 1 - 8 Channels 1 - 8 of song playback SONG CH 9 -16 Channels 9 - 16 of song playback 2 Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters. For information on the various parameters and settings and how to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 113. You can quickly and easily set all parts to the same value for the same parameter (except for the VOICE parameter). Simultaneously hold down the [A] [J] button that corresponds to the parameter you want to change and use the [1] [8] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial to change the value. n For details on parameters related to the Sound Creator, see page 80. END Close the Mixing Console display by pressing the [EXIT] button. ■ About the parameters • VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 113) This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 143) with the rich and dynamic voices that are exclusive to the PSR-A1000. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your song playback. • FILTER (page 114) These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound. • TUNE (page 114) These give you various tuning controls. • EFFECT (page 115) These control the amount of effect applied to the sound. 112 PSR-A1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112. 1 Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special voices of the PSR-A1000. To use the normal XG voice set, turn this off. Use these to select the VOICE, PANPOT, or VOLUME parameter rows. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR The [RHY2] categories in the STYLE PART display are only for the Drum Kit/SFX Kit (percussion) voice. n A F B G C H D I E J The [RHY1] channel in the STYLE PART display can be assigned to any voice except for the Organ Flutes voice. DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels. n Allows you to select the specific voice to be replaced. These let you select the voice of each part, and adjust the panpot and volume. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOICE Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 51). When the Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected. PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right. VOLUME Determines the level of each channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. 2 F ALL REVOICE Replaces all of the replaceable XG voices with the rich and authentic voices of the PSRA1000. G When playing GM song data, channel 10 (in the SONG CH 9 - 16 page) can only be used for a Drum Kit voice. When changing the rhythm/ percussion voices (drum kits, etc.) of the accompaniment style and song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the song and playing back from that point. In the case of accompaniment style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same style again. Keep in mind that using the Revoice function may result in unnatural or unexpected sound, depending on the particular song data. H I J BASIC REVOICE Replaces only the recommended voices that are suitable for playing back the song. ALL NO REVOICE All the voices are returned to the original XG voices. 1 2 3 Selects the XG voices to be replaced (voices usually used when playing back) 4 5 6 7 8 Executes the settings and closes the Auto Revoice Setup display. Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without executing the settings. Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices (when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON). PSR-A1000 113 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112. Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters. For details about the Filter, see page 81. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR n A F B G C H D I E J DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART Be careful with these controls. Depending on the selected voice, extreme settings may result in noise or distortion. Each press of this button switches among the various parts/ channels. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HARMONIC ........ Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (see “Harmonic Content” on page 81). BRIGHTNESS .... Determines the brightness of the sound by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 81). 8 Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112. Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING. A F B G C H D I E J Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from one note to the next. Refer to the explanation below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units. MASTER ...Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback. SONG........Transposes the pitch of the song playback. KBD ..........Transposes the pitch of the keyboard. PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 55, 80), this determines the Portamento time. The higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). PITCH BEND RANGE ...........Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is from “0” to ”12” with each step corresponding to one semitone. OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. The value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button. TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument. 114 PSR-A1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Adjusting the Effects The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112. 1 Indicates the type name for each effect block. Press this to edit and store the effect (page 115, 116). DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR A F B G C H There are three effect sections: Reverb, Chorus, and DSP (which contains a variety of effect types). For details, refer to the Effect Block list (page 116). DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART D I E J Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Switches among the effect sections: REVERB, CHORUS, and DSP. 8 Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 116. 2 F G H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When the BLOCK parameter is set to REVERB, CHORUS, or DSP1-4/DSP, press this to call up the display from which you can change the detailed settings for the effects. These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect. BLOCK............Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects). PART ...............Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only when BLOCK is set to “DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and VALUE is set to “Insertion.” CATEGORY.....The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This parameter may not be available depending on the selected block. TYPE ...............Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block. PSR-A1000 115 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console 3 A F B G C H D I E J Switches between the upper/lower parameters. For the lower parameter, the depth can be changed when the [VARIATION] button is on. Calls up the display for storing the effect. Determines the level of the effect (return level). This is not available when BLOCK is set to “DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and VALUE is set to “Insertion.” 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the effect block. Determines the value of the selected parameter. Determines the effect category. Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted. Determines the effect type. 4 F Calls up the display for naming the User Effect (page 42). G Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect parameters while playing the instrument. H I J Select the destination to which the effect is to be stored. The number of memory spaces available for the destination differs for each block (refer to the chart below). Stores the effect settings you made above to a User Effect location (SYSTEM) for future recall. To call up the effect, select USER from the CATEGORY parameter and select the desired effect from the TYPE parameter. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Effect Block Block REVERB CHORUS DSP 116 PSR-A1000 Parts Characteristics All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. Number of User Effect 3 All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously. 3 Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16), Style In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this section features a variety of special effects, including distortion. 3 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Effect Structure The PSR-A1000 features the following digital effect systems. The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set with the panel controls. About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specific part. Reverb and Chorus are System effects. The DSP effect can be configured for either System or Insertion routing. The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send/return controls set on the PSR-A1000. DRY LINE Dry MAIN VOICE DSP Rev Send When DSP is set as an Insertion effect (here PART is set to MAIN), it is put here in the signal flow. Cho Send REVERB Reverb Return DSP Send Dry LAYER VOICE Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send OUT CHORUS Chorus Return Dry LEFT VOICE Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send Dry STYLE/SONG (each channel) Rev Send Cho Send When DSP is set as a System effect, it is put here in the signal flow. DSP Send DSP DSP Return PSR-A1000 117 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR-A1000 to your own musical needs and preferences. FUNCTION Operation 1 MENU DEMO 2 Select the desired function. HELP FUNCTION 3 Set the parameters of the selected function. The operations for each function are covered in the following explanations. END To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT] button. Adjusting the Pitch — Master Tune ■ Master Tune (page 120) This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 121) These allow you to set parameters related to song playback. Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering ■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 122) These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point. ■ Chord Fingering (page 123) This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display. 118 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller ■ Pedal (page 123) These settings determine how the connected foot pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches) are used. They can be assigned to a variety of functions, letting you control operations with your feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/ off, or triggering Fill In patterns. ■ Keyboard / Panel (page 125) These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the keyboard (how touch affects volume), and the pitch transpose settings (for the keyboard, song data, and entire instrument). Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ■ Registration Sequence (page 126) This determines the order in which the Registration Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal. ■ Freeze (page 126) This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. ■ Voice Set (page 127) This lets you determine whether certain voice-related settings (such as Effects, Harmony, etc.) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. Making MIDI Settings ■ System (page 129) These determine various system messages settings (such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well as Local Control on/off. ■ Transmit (page 130) This determines how playback data is sent to connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over each channel. ■ Receive (page 131) This determines how the parts of the PSR-A1000 respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be received over each channel. ■ Root (page 131) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root notes, for use with the auto accompaniment. ■ Chord Detect (page 131) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the chords, for use with the auto accompaniment. Other Settings — Utility ■ Config 1 (page 132) This page contains settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound. ■ Config 2 (page 133) From this page, you can adjust the display, and change the voice number indication. Setting Harmony and Echo (page 127) ■ Disk (page 134) These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the amount of effect. ■ Owner (page 135) From this page, you can format disks, and copy from disk to disk. From this page, you can set the language of the instrument, and input your own name — which is shown automatically every time the power is turned on. ■ System Reset (page 135) This function restores the PSR-A1000 to its original factory settings. You can also specify which types of settings are to be restored, as well as store your own original settings for future recall. PSR-A1000 119 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Fine Tuning the Pitch — Master Tune The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune Hz (Hertz) This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound, and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. n The Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices. 1 120 PSR-A1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the overall pitch of the PSRA1000, from 414.8 466.8 Hz. Press the 4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Allows you to play back all songs from the same folder continuously. Turns Quick Start on/off (see note). A F B G C H D I E J Quick Start On some commercially available song data, certain settings related to the song (such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the PSR-A1000 reads all initial non-note data of the song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. n 1 Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK2] button. Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK1] button. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether the Phrase Mark Repeat function for the song is on or off. When this is on, you can repeatedly play back a specified phrase (selection of measures) of the song. The method for setting a phrase mark is the same as that in the SONG POSITION display (page 69). Channel Refers to the MIDI channel (page 141). The channels are assigned as follows: Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 n Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data. When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper Track 1 and Track 2 channels. Normally, this should be set to “ON.” PSR-A1000 121 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting and Split Point F G H I J These select the part to which the split point setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand range, or both. Press the desired key for the split point while holding down one of these buttons. The pressed key is included in the range for the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard (ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT). A+L (ACMP + LEFT) Allows you to simultaneously set the split point for both the left-hand range and the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. About Section Set When any of the Main A-D sections is not included in the accompaniment style data, the nearest section is automatically selected. For example, when Main D is not contained in the selected accompaniment style, Main C will be called up. L (LEFT) Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard. A (ACMP) Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the lefthand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these buttons by themselves to set the split point value. Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped). Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard). The PSR-A1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 62) simply by quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time. Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to “ON,” you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords — even when the accompaniment style is not playing back. About Split Point Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto Accompaniment area (ACMP) and left-hand area (LEFT) from the righthand area (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than the LEFT split point. Split point (A) Auto Accompaniment area Right-hand Left-hand area area Split point (A) + (L) Auto Accompaniment area + Left-hand area 122 PSR-A1000 Split point (L) Right-hand area Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below). Indicates the note that belongs to a chord. Some notes can be omitted. The chord name is indicated next to “CHORD NAME.” .. Required .. Can be omitted .. Either note can be omitted .. Can be omitted when the note indicated by is omitted 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 This lets you change the chord type. Determines the fingering type (page 59). Indicates the note that belongs to a chord in the music. The chord indication in the display applies to the Fingered method, regardless if another method is actually selected. Chord Tutor The Chord Tutor feature is essentially an electronic “chord book” that shows you appropriate fingerings for chords; it is useful when you want to play certain chords. Simply specify the desired chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons, and the fingerings for the Fingered method are indicated in the display. This lets you change the root note from the chord. Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Making Settings for the Pedals Determines the particular pedal to which a function is to be assigned. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 Determines the function to be assigned to the selected pedal. Any one of the available functions can be assigned to each pedal. For information on the assignable functions, see “Pedal-controllable Functions” on the next page. 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the [FOOT PEDAL 1/2] jack. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/ brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation. If necessary, you can turn the corresponding part ON/ OFF or set the control depth (see the next page). PSR-A1000 123 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Pedal-controllable Functions VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (FOOT PEDAL 2 only) to control the volume. SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the first note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to certain voices — PIANO, for example. GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 114). PITCHBEND* Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the PITCH BEND wheel. MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the MODULATION wheel. DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button. HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button. SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button. SYNCRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button. INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button. MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button. MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button. MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button. MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button. FILL DOWN A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing. BREAK Break starts playing. FILL UP A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button. FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button. FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 59). BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the fingering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. MAIN ON/OFF Same as the [MAIN] button. LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button. LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button. * For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller. The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display. SONG, STYLE, LEFT, LAYER, MAIN These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal. HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working. This can be set for certain kinds of pedals, such as the foot pedal (YAMAHA FC7) (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released. KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal. PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal. * For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller. 124 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel Keyboard Touch The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences. Selects the desired parameter: Keyboard Touch or Transpose Assign. HARD 2 Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a heavy touch. HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for higher volume. A B C NORMAL Standard touch response. D SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate playing strength. SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch. E Determines the Touch sensitivity setting (Keyboard Touch only; refer to the table at right). Determines the fixed volume level when touch is set to “off” (Keyboard Touch only). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep in mind that you can set each voice to a different touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can set this so that the voice is not affected by touch (page 80). Determines whether Touch is on or not for the corresponding parts. Transpose Assign This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button. Transpose Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices, accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units. 1 Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons. TRANSPOSE RESET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE ASSIGN, appears. 3 Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons. 8 KEYBOARD For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and the accompaniment styles. SONG For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of the songs. MASTER For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the entire instrument (keyboard voices, accompaniment styles, and songs). The transpose function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices. END Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the [EXIT] button. • Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song These settings can be used to match both the song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song. The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data down to your comfortable singing key. PSR-A1000 125 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets — Registration Sequence You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play. Indicates the file name of the selected Registration Memory bank. Determines which pedal is used to advance (increment) through the sequence. Determines which pedal is used to reverse (decrement) through the sequence. Determines how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence. Stop Pressing the [NEXT] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” Top The sequence starts again at the beginning. Next Bank The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory bank in the same folder. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turns the Registration Sequence function on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the programmed Registration Sequence is shown at the top right of the Main display, and you can step through the sequence in this display by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedals. Deletes the number at the cursor position. Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory preset immediately before the cursor position. Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. END 8 n When both “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set to “OFF,” the pedals cannot be used to step through the Registration Sequence; only the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons can be used in the MAIN display. n When both “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set to the same pedal, “Regist (+) Pedal” takes priority. Deletes all Registration Memory numbers in the sequence. Indicates the Registration Memory preset numbers, in the order of the current Registration Sequence. These move the cursor position in the sequence. 7 Setting Registration Sequence Enable to “ON” overrides any other Pedal settings (for pedals assigned to “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” here). These include the pedal settings on page 123, and in Voice Set on page 127. Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. Registration Sequence data is included as part of the Registration Memory bank file. To save your newly programmed Registration Sequence, store the current Registration Memory bank file (page 35, 41). Any Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory banks, unless you’ve stored it with the Registration Memory bank file. Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. For details, see page 78. 126 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set When changing voices (selecting a voice file), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to “OFF” in this page. Normally, these should all be set to “ON.” A Use these to select the desired part. B C Harmony/echo cannot be set for the Layer and Left parts. D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings (Voice selection, Effects, and Harmony/echo assignment) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part. Setting Harmony and Echo The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Determines the Harmony type. For details, see page 128. 1 2 3 4 5 Determines the level of the Harmony effect. Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. 6 7 8 Determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that belongs to a chord played in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. This parameter is not available when Multi Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. This lets you assign the Harmony effect to various parts. For details, see page 128. PSR-A1000 127 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function About the Harmony Types When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected Split point Chords played to the left of the split point control the harmony. Harmony notes (based on the chord and the selected type) are automatically added to the melody played to the right of the split point. When “Multi Assign” is selected Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the first is played by the Main voice and the second by the Layer voice. When “Echo” is selected An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo. When “Tremolo” is selected A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo. When “Trill” is selected Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo. About the Harmony Assignments AUTO Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts. Multi This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice. Main Harmony is applied only to the Main part. When the Main part is turned off, Harmony is not applied. Layer Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied. 128 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the MIDI Parameters In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the USER display, for future recall.For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 139). The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. 1 A F B G C H D I E J 1 3 Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set) Select the desired template. 2 3 4 Call up the User display and press this button to save the newly edited MIDI settings. Up to ten setups can be saved. 5 2 6 7 All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer and Left. Master KBD The PSR-A1000 functions as a master keyboard for controlling external tone generators or other devices. KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play instead of the individual parts (Main/ Layer/Left). Song All Transmit channels are set to correspond to the Song channels 1-16. Use this to play the PSR-A1000 song data with an external tone generator, or to record your entire performance to an external sequencer. Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and PSR-A1000 synchronizes with a external MIDI device. MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the keyboard voice and accompaniment style with a MIDI accordion. MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI accordion control the accompaniment style, as well as play the chord and bass parts. MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal controls the bass note of the accompaniment. MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal plays the bass part. MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor received. 8 Call up the Edit display, then select and set the desired functions/parameters. For details about each of the MIDI edit displays, see the following pages. The saved settings can be named (page 38) or deleted (page 40) in the User page. END Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System Call up the display as described in step 2 above. For editing the Local Control parameters. For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop parameters. For editing the Message Switch parameters. Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PSR-A1000 controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR-A1000’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR-A1000’s internal voices, and use the PSR-A1000 keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. PSR-A1000 129 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop ■ Clock Determines whether the PSR-A1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PSR-A1000 is being used alone. If you are using the PSR-A1000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-A1000 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the PSR-A1000 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal. ■ Transmit Clock Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is transmitted. ■ Receive Transpose When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PSR-A1000 is not transposed, and when it is set to “ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-A1000 keyboard transpose (page 125) setting. ■ Start/Stop Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or style playback. FA, FC MIDI messages for starting/stopping the song or style. The “FA” message corresponds to start, and “FC” corresponds to stop. Message Switch SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF. SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and type) ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE).......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF. Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. A Determines the channel for changing transmit settings. B C D E Determines the Part for the selected channel. The dots corresponding to each channel (1-16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns transmission of the specified data type on or off. See below for details on the data types. Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data. Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers. Pitch Bend (PB) See page 124. After Touch (AT)* With this function, the PSR-A1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique. * Available in RECEIVE display only (page 131). 130 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Receiving MIDI Data — Receive This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received. The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal (Port A of the CBX driver) correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO HOST terminal (Port B of the CBX driver) corresponds to channels 17 - 32. A Determines the channel for changing receive settings. B C The dots corresponding to each channel (1 - 32) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). D E Determines the Part for the selected channel. See below for details about the receive parts. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns reception of the specified data type on or off. See page 130 for details on the data types. MIDI Receive Parts OFF SONG MAIN LAYER LEFT KEYBOARD ACMP RHYTHM1-2 ACMP BASS ACMP CHORD1-2 ACMP PAD ACMP PHRASE1-2 EXTRA PART1-5 No MIDI data is received. Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16 correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively. The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. MIDI note data received by the PSR-A1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard. The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2. The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS. The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2. The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD. The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2. There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. When these five channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator. Setting Root Note Channels — Root The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal (Port A of the CBX driver) correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO HOST terminal (Port B of the CBX driver) corresponds to channels 17 - 32. A Selects the channels in groups of eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25 - 32, respectively. B C D E When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the root note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sets all channels to OFF. Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the ROOT display above. PSR-A1000 131 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Other Settings — Utility The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1 Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out. Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 5.0 seconds). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). Metronome These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the level of the metronome sound. Determines which sound is used for the metronome. Bell Off ........................ Conventional metronome sound, with no bell. Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell. 132 PSR-A1000 Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. When you start the song or accompaniment style, the values matching to them are automatically set. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Parameter Lock This function is used to “lock” the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls — in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, or song and sequence data. Selects the desired parameter for locking/ unlocking. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether the selected parameter is locked (checkmarked) or unlocked (empty). Tap Count This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 48). Determines the particular sound used for the Tap Start function. Any drum or percussion sound in the Standard Kit (page 52) can be selected. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the level of the tap sound. Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2 Determines the brightness of the backlit display. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether or not the voice bank and number are shown in the PRESET page of the VOICE display (page 51). This is useful when you want to check the proper bank select MSB/LSB values and program number to specify when selecting the voice from an external MIDI device. PSR-A1000 133 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk This function copies all the data from one disk to another, letting you back up all your important data before editing. For instructions, see “Copying from Disk to Disk” below. F G H I This function formats a floppy disk (see below). J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to “ON,” the PSR-A1000 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted. Copying from Disk to Disk As shown below, first copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PSR-A1000, then copy the data to the backup (destination) disk. 1 3 Press the [F] button. A message appears, prompting you to insert the source disk. At the “Please insert a destination disk and press the OK button ” prompt, eject the source disk and replace it with a blank, formatted disk, then press “OK.” To abort the operation, press “CANCEL.” 2 4 Copy When the operation is finished (or when prompted), eject the destination disk. Disk Lamp When the power is turned on, the disk lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the DISK page above. PSR-A1000 Internal memory Insert the disk containing the original data into the drive and press “OK.” A “Now copying” message appears, and the PSR-A1000 begins copying data to internal memory. To abort the operation, press “CANCEL.” Formatting a Disk When using an unformatted disk for the first time, make sure to properly format it on the PSR-A1000. This includes blank disks as well as disks already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the disk. 134 • Copying cannot be done between a 2DD disk and 2HD disk. When copying, make sure both disk are the same type. • Depending on the amount of data contained in the original source disk, you may have to swap the two disks several times until all of the data is properly copied. • Make sure to read the section “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 7. Source disk Copy Destination disk Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws. Copying commercially available data is strictly prohibited, except for your own personal use. Some music software is purposely copy-protected and cannot be copied. The Format operation initializes a disk with a specific file system, allowing the corresponding device (in this case, the PSR-A1000) to access it properly. Since there are several types of formats and disks available, you should know which ones to use with the PSRA1000. 2DD disks are formatted to a capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks are formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB. CAUTION Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk. Make sure that the disk you’re formatting does not contain important data! Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner F G H Press this button to enter an Owner name (for instructions on naming see page 42). This name is automatically shown when you turn the power on. I J Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset This operation lets you restore the PSR-A1000 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI Setup, User Effect, and Files & Folders. Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. You can also restore only the System Setup settings by simultaneously holding down the highest key on the keyboard (C6) and turning on the power. Restores the MIDI templates to the original factory settings. Restores the User Effects (page 116) to the original factory settings. A F B G C H D I E J The functions and settings below do not apply to the Factory Reset operation. However, you can restore these to their original settings by calling up the preset System Setup files from the PRESET page in the SYSTEM SETUP Open/Save display. Language Owner Name LCD Brightness Deletes all files and folders stored in the User page. 1 2 Executes the Factory Reset operation for all items checkmarked above. 3 4 5 6 7 8 These call up the corresponding Open/ Save displays. These let you store the corresponding data as files for future recall. From the PRESET page, you can also recall the respective factory settings. PSR-A1000 135 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices CAUTION Before connecting the PSR-A1000 to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. 2 Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/ OUTPUT jacks) You can connect the PSR-A1000 to a wide range of audio equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks. Connect as shown in the illustrations below using standard audio cables. 1 Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. 1 Using the Headphones (PHONES jack). CAUTION A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack (page 133). When the PSR-A1000 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the PSR-A1000, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. P.136 To powered speaker Audio cable 2 RCA pin plug Phone plug (standard) RCA pin plug AUX IN R L AUX OUT R L/L+R OUTPUT DC IN 16V (LEVEL FIXED) R L AUX OUT R L/L+R OUTPUT (LEVEL FIXED) Cassette tape recorder stereo system P.138 5 TO HOST Mac PC1 PC2 P.137 4 MIDI HOST SELECT IN MIDI OUT P.137 3 When these are connected (with RCA pin plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level, regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] control setting. When these are connected (with standard phone plugs), you can use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. 2 FOOT PEDAL • If you connect the PSR-A1000 to a monaural device, use only the OUTPUT L/L+R jack. 136 PSR-A1000 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices 3 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack) By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks, you can replicate the function of some panel buttons, doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment. By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the FC7) to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack, you can control any one of a variety of important functions with your foot — such as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play (page 123). The polarity of the foot switch (normal or reverse) can also be changed (page 123). CAUTION Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is turned off. 4 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals) Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the PSR-A1000. Make sure to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to MIDI when you use these connectors. For more information about connections, see “What You Can Do With MIDI” on page 142. MIDI IN........... Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device MIDI OUT ....... Sends out MIDI messages generated by the PSR-A1000 For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to the following sections: • What’s MIDI? (page 139) • What You Can Do With MIDI (page 142) • MIDI functions (page 129) • Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters. PSR-A1000 137 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices 5 Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal) Connect your PSR-A1000 to computer and take advantage of the wide range of powerful and versatile software for creating and editing music. The PSR-A1000 can be connected in three ways. ■ Using the TO HOST terminal ■ Using the MIDI terminals ■ Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional Using the TO HOST terminal Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-A1000. For the connection cable, use the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that matches the personal computer type. If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250 bps.) USB interface (UX series) ■ IBM-PC/AT (Windows) • You’ll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform. • When connecting the PSR-A1000 to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the PSR-A1000 and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of the computer first, then that of the PSR-A1000. Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-A1000 using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PSR-A1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2.” (Data transfer rate is 38,400 bps.) • If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-A1000, make sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable is left connected, the PSR-A1000 may not function properly. • When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” “PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST terminal. Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the PSR-A1000’s TO HOST terminal, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows). The Floppy Disk that came with your PSRA1000 contains the compressed driver file “mididrv.zip.” After extracting the file, execute the installation by double-clicking on the “Setup.exe” file in the “MidiDrv” folder and follow the on-screen directions. In addition, you can download this driver from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS MINI DIN 8-pin Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 MINI DIN 8-pin D-sub 9-pin ■ Macintosh Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-A1000 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the PSR-A1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “MAC” (Data transfer rate is 31,250 bps). Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the particular software you are using. Mac PC-1 PSR-A1000 D-sub 25-pin NEC * When using a D-SUB 25P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a DSUB9P plug adaptor on the computer side of the cable. MINI DIN 8-pin 138 D-sub 9-pin MIDI PC-2 MINI DIN 8-pin Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices Using the MIDI terminals Using the USB terminal on your computer with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96, etc.) When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-A1000 with standard MIDI cables. Connect the UX256/UX96 and the computer with a USB cable. Install the included UX256/UX96 driver to the computer, and connect the UX256/UX96 to the PSRA1000 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR-A1000 to “MIDI.” For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the UX256/UX96. • When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN OUT MIDI NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS USB cable NEC MultiSync NEC UX256 MIDI IN PC-9821 AS MIDI OUT NEC Personal computer Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 Mac PC-1 • When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSRA1000, as shown in the diagram below. Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” MIDI IN RS422 MIDI OUT MINI DIN 8-pin Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 • When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the TO HOST terminal is disabled. MIDI PC-2 For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant owner’s manuals. What’s MIDI? Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Acoustic guitar note production • When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the particular software you are using. Digital instrument note production Internal amp L Tone generator (Electric circuit) Internal amp R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. PSR-A1000 139 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a recording. When you playback a music CD (for example, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound (vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data. Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument (audio data) Recording Playback The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano, special recording equipment is needed. However, since the PSR-A1000 features a built-in sequencer that lets you record performance data, this recording equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument — the PSR-A1000 — allows you to both record and play back the data. Tone generator Sequencer In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the actual piano performance. The piano itself is not necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them. Recording and playing back the performance of a digital instrument (MIDI data) Recording Playback Tone generator Keyboard performance (MIDI data) However, we also need a sound source to produce the audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The tone generator of the PSR-A1000 fills this function. The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument, such as guitar or violin. Sequencer Controller (keyboard, etc.) FD Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-A1000 can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer. FD In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument. 140 PSR-A1000 Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR-A1000 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices ■ Example Keyboard Data Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Panel operations on the PSR-A1000, such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs also consist of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The PSR-A1000 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data.The PSR-A1000 can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data: • The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI songs to floppy disk. • The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. ■ Channel Messages The PSR-A1000 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO HOST terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name PSR-A1000 Operation/Panel Setting Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting) Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc. MIDI channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel.Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather Report News 1 2 News 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2 The PSR-A1000’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI (page 129). For example, several tracks (channels) can be transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as shown below). Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR-A1000 to an external sequencer MIDI cable or serial cable PSR-A1000 track (channnel) MAIN LAYER LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 External sequencer Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI data. PSR-A1000 141 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 130). The PSR-A1000 also allows you to determine how the received data is played back. (page 131). ■ System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name PSR-A1000 Operation/Panel Setting System Exclusive Message Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc. Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-A1000 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the separate Data List. What You Can Do With MIDI The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSRA1000: • MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various applications) (page 129) • Transmit (page 130) • Receive (page 131) • Local Control (page 129) • Clock (page 130) ■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-A1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the PSR-A1000 (playback). PSR-A1000 MIDI receive MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS NEC MIDI transmit Personal cumputer, QY series etc. When you want to use the PSR-A1000 as an XGcompatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI Receive (page 131). ■ Play and control the PSR-A1000 from a separate keyboard PSR-A1000 MIDI receive MIDI IN 142 PSR-A1000 MIDI OUT Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by PSR-A1000, and whether or not the PSR-A1000 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Disk format Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used.This operation is called “formatting.” • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. • PSR-A1000 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks. • When formatted by the PSR-A1000, a 2DD disk stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.) • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices Sequence Format Voice Allocation Format The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-A1000 is compatible with the following formats. With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The PSR-A1000 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. • Song data recorded on the PSR-A1000 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0. • Song data loaded to the PSR-A1000 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original format. ■ ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-A1000 series instruments.This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. The PSR-A1000 is compatible with the following formats. Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. ■ GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level1, as is most commercially available software. ■ XG ■ XF XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) format with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. • Song data recorded on the PSR-A1000 using voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible. • The PSR-A1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. ■ DOC ■ Style File The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR series instruments.This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software. PSR-A1000 143 Troubleshooting Problem 144 Possible Cause and Solution • The PSR-A1000 does not turn on; there is no power. Make sure that the PSR-A1000 has been plugged in properly (page 16). • A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument. • Noise is heard from the PSR-A1000’s speakers. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-A1000 may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the PSR-A1000. • The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature; try adjusting the contrast (page 17). • The keyboard volume is low compared to that of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback. The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 58). • The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback is low compared to that of the keyboard. The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display (page 113). • The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. • The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. • The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 58). • Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 58, 69). • Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the headphones. • Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 129). • Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-A1000. When this happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. See page 146 for information on the maximum polyphony. • Accompaniment style or Song playback does not start. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 130). • Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 58); to playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 67). • “New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an appropriate song in the SONG display (page 67). • The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 69). • The Multi Pads do not play back, even when one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed. MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 130). • Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button. • The accompaniment style does not start, even when Synchro Start is in standby condition and a key is pressed. You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment) range of the keyboard. • The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment. • You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 60). • You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode (page 59). • An unexpected result or malfunction occurred during an operation. If, during execution of an operation, you simultaneously press three or more buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure, unexpected or unusual results may occur. • Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard. This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different fingering mode (page 59). PSR-A1000 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution • Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 72). • Some channels do not properly play back when playing back song data. Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 69). • The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 59). • MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables are connected properly. Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI” (page 139). The MIDI terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings. • When a voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed. Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 127). • There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes played on the keyboard. • Some voices have a looping sound. • Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending upon the voice. This is normal and is a result of the PSR-A1000’s sampling system. • Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers. This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. • Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1 megabyte of data to a floppy disk. • The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 114). • The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. • This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects (page 115). • Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 81) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary. • A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 53) or change the voice for each part (page 51). PSR-A1000 145 Specifications : available Model Name PSR-A1000 Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Display 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD Keyboard 61 keys (C1 - C6 with Initial Touch) Voice Polyphony (max) 32 Number of Voices 276 regular voices + 480 XG voices + 20 Drum Kits Number of Oriental Voices 43 Number of Oriental Drum Kits 6 Number of Sweet Voices 3 Number of Cool Voices 1 Sound creator Effects Effect Blocks Effect Types Accompaniment Style Reverb 1 Chorus 1 DSP 1 REVERB 23 Preset+3 User CHORUS 15 Preset+3 User DSP 93 Preset+3 User Number of Accompaniment Styles 190 Number of Oriental Styles 123 Number of Session Styles 4 Fingering Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard Style Creator Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ Preset Songs Lyrics Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing Record Channels 4 Pads ✕ 80 Banks Multi Pad Preset Memory Device Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD) Flash Memory (internal) Flash Availability Tempo 16 260KB Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc. Tempo Range 5 - 500 Tap Tempo Metronome Sound 146 PSR-A1000 Bell on/off Specifications Model Name Scale Scale Memory buttons Scale Template Registration Memory PSR-A1000 Scale Tuning Buttons 6 Equal Temperament, Bayat, Rast, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean-Tone, Werckmeister, Kirnberger 8 Regist Sequence Freeze Others Demo Language Function, Voice, Style 3 languages (English, German, French) Help Direct Access Master Volume Fade In/Out Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master Tuning Touch Response Jacks/Connectors Pedal Functions Amplifiers/ Speakers VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO, PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG START/STOP, STYLE START/STOP, etc. Amplifiers 12 W ✕ 2 Speakers (12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2 Power Consumption 31 W Power supply Yamaha AC adaptor PA-300 (included) *May not be included in your area.Please check with your Yamaha dealer. Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H] (without Music Stand) Weight Optional accessories 5 level DC IN, PHONES, MIDI (OUT, IN), TO HOST, HOST SELECT SW, FOOT PEDAL1 (SWITCH), FOOT PEDAL2, AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), OUTPUT (L/L+R) 973 ✕ 399 ✕ 161 mm [38-5/16" ✕ 15-11/16" ✕ 6-5/16"] 10.0 Kg (22 lbs., 1 oz) Headphones HPE-150 Foot Switch FC4 / FC5 Foot Controller FC7 Keyboard Stand L-6, L-7 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Thanks YAMAHA Corporation wishes to express our thanks to: Mr. Mohammed Saleh (Lebanon) Mr. Sairos Isa (Bahrain) Mr. Wadea Al Kandari (Kuwait) Mr. Fawaz Al Kandari (Kuwait) Mr. Arash Adelpour (Iran) Mr. Dimitris Vassiliou (Greece) Mr. Ahmet Can Basar (Turkey) Mr. Mehmet Dogdu (Turkey) for composing Styles/Demos and their cooperation. PSR-A1000 147 Index Numerics 1 - 16 ............................................................................. 87, 96 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 19, 35–42 A A (ACMP) ........................................................................... 122 [A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 19, 37 Accent Type ....................................................................... 105 Accessories ............................................................................ 6 Accompaniment style parts................................................... 85 [ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 57 ACMP TOUCH .................................................................. 122 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 112 Adjusting the display contrast ............................................... 17 Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 115 Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning ......................... 72 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 47 Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 58 Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels ... 69 Adjusting values ................................................................... 43 AI ......................................................................................... 59 AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 59 AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 59 A+L (ACMP + LEFT)............................................................ 122 Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 54 Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 61 Assembling an Accompaniment Style ................................. 103 ASSIGN (HARMONY) .......................................................... 82 ATTACK (Regular Voice) ...................................................... 81 AUTO .................................................................................. 20 AUTO CH SET ................................................................... 121 [AUTO FILL IN] button................................................... 18, 63 Auto Revoice...................................................................... 113 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 136 B [BACK] button .......................................................... 19, 37, 43 BALANCE............................................................................. 58 [BALANCE] button ......................................................... 19, 58 Bar Clear ............................................................................ 106 Bar Copy ............................................................................ 106 base note.............................................................................. 72 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 35 Bass...................................................................................... 85 Bayat .................................................................................... 73 Beat Converter.................................................................... 104 Boost/Cut ........................................................................... 105 [BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 61 BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 81 C Cent ..................................................................................... 72 Change the Rhythmic Feel.................................................. 104 Changing Pitch-related Settings .......................................... 114 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings .......... 127 Changing the Icon ................................................................ 43 Changing the Tone of the Voice ......................................... 114 Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose ................... 125 Channel ................................................... 58, 69, 93, 106, 121 Channel Messages .............................................................. 141 Channel Muting ................................................................... 58 148 PSR-A1000 CHANNEL ON/OFF........................................................58, 69 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................19, 58, 69 Channel Transpose ...............................................................95 CHD .....................................................................................97 Chord ...................................................................................85 Chord Detect ......................................................................131 Chord Events.........................................................................97 Chord Fingering ............................................................59, 123 CHORD NOTE ONLY (HARMONY).....................................82 Chord Tutor ........................................................................123 Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode ....................60 Chorus ................................................................................117 CHORUS DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................82 Clock ..................................................................................130 COMMON ...........................................................................80 COMPARE ............................................................................79 Compatible Song Types ........................................................66 CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................132 CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................133 Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................137 Connecting to a Computer ..................................................138 Controller ...........................................................................123 Cool! ....................................................................................52 COPY ...................................................................................40 Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................134 Copying Files/Folders............................................................40 Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................134 Creating Accompaniment Styles............................................99 Current Memory ...................................................................36 Customizing the Event List — Filter.......................................98 CUT......................................................................................39 D Data Compatibility..............................................................142 [DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................19, 43 Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........130 DC IN terminal .............................................................19, 136 DECAY .................................................................................81 DELETE (Basic Operations)....................................................40 Delete (Song Creator)............................................................94 Deleting Files/Folders............................................................40 [DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 49 DEPTH..................................................................................82 DESTINATION......................................................................94 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button..........................14, 18, 83, 99 [DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................19, 44 Direct Access Chart ..............................................................45 Disk ....................................................................................134 Disk format .........................................................................142 Disk Orchestra Collection.....................................................17 DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER .................................................133 Displaying the Lyrics.............................................................71 Displaying Upper Level pages...............................................41 DOC...................................................................................143 Drum ....................................................................................52 [DSP] button ...........................................................19, 54, 117 DSP DEPTH (Sound Creator).................................................82 Dynamics ...........................................................................105 E ECHO ...........................................................................55, 127 Edit .....................................................................................102 Index Edit the Created Accompaniment Style ............................... 104 Editing a Recorded Song....................................................... 93 Editing Channel-related Parameters ...................................... 93 Editing Chord Events ............................................................ 97 Editing Note Events .............................................................. 96 Editing System Events ........................................................... 97 Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 106 Editing Voices ...................................................................... 79 EFFECT ................................................................................. 82 Effect Block ........................................................................ 116 Effect Connections.............................................................. 117 Effect Structure ................................................................... 117 Effects................................................................................. 115 EG ........................................................................................ 81 EG ATTACK (Sound Creator) ................................................ 81 EG DECAY (Sound Creator) .................................................. 81 EG RELES. (Sound Creator) ................................................... 81 Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29 END Mark ............................................................................ 91 ENDING .............................................................................. 63 [ENDING / rit.] button .............................................. 18, 30, 62 [ENTER] button .............................................................. 19, 43 Entering Characters............................................................... 42 Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ........................... 90 Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) ............................ 42 Entering numbers ................................................................. 42 Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent)................. 42 Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 135 Equal Temperament.............................................................. 73 ESEQ .................................................................................. 143 Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 141 [EXIT] button .................................................................. 19, 37 exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 37 Expand/Compress ............................................................... 105 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button .................................... 18, 70 F Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time ........... 132 [FADE IN / OUT] button................................................. 18, 62 [FF] button ..................................................................... 18, 69 File ....................................................................................... 36 File/Folder-related Operations .............................................. 38 Files/folders in a floppy disk ................................................. 39 Fill........................................................................................ 63 Filter....................................................................... 81, 98, 114 FILTER BRIGHT (Sound Creator)........................................... 81 FILTER HARMO. (Sound Creator) ......................................... 81 Fine .................................................................................... 104 FINGERED ........................................................................... 59 FINGERED ON BASS............................................................ 59 First Key On ......................................................................... 92 FLOPPY DISK drive .............................................................. 36 FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN.................................... 134 Floppy disk drive .............................................................. 19, 7 FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack ....................................................... 137 [FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack................................. 19, 137 [FOOT PEDAL 2] jack .................................................. 19, 137 Formatting a Disk ............................................................... 134 [FREEZE] button.............................................................. 19, 78 Freeze .......................................................................... 78, 126 FULL KEYBOARD................................................................. 59 [FUNCTION] button .................................................... 18, 118 G Gate Time ............................................................................ 88 GM System Level 1 .......................................................17, 143 Groove ...............................................................................104 Groove parameters .............................................................104 GROUP SELECT....................................................................76 H Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........7 Harmonic Content ................................................................81 HARMONY ............................................................55, 82, 127 Harmony Assignments ........................................................128 Harmony Types ..................................................................128 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ..........................................19, 55 Headphones .......................................................................136 Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages.................................................46 [HELP] button .................................................................18, 46 High Key.............................................................................108 [HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 137 Hz ......................................................................................120 I ICON....................................................................................43 ICON SELECT .......................................................................43 Inputting and Editing Lyrics...................................................98 Instant Selection of Displays .................................................44 INTRO ..................................................................................63 [INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 61 K Kbd.Vel.................................................................................88 Keyboard Percussion.............................................................52 Keyboard Touch .................................................................125 Keyboard/Panel...................................................................125 Kirnberger.............................................................................73 L L (LEFT)...............................................................................122 Layer.....................................................................................53 Layering Two Different Voices ..............................................53 LCD ......................................................................................15 [LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................19, 17 Left .......................................................................................54 [LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................19, 55 Local Control ......................................................................129 Loop recording .....................................................................99 Lyrics ..............................................................................71, 98 M MAIN A/B/C/D......................................................................61 MAIN [A] button.............................................................18, 61 MAIN [B] button .............................................................18, 61 MAIN [C] button.............................................................18, 61 MAIN [D] button ............................................................18, 61 Maintaining Panel Settings ..................................................126 Making Global and Other Important Settings ......................118 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)129 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap .................................................132 Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication ........................................................................133 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ......................123 Making Style File Format Settings........................................107 Master Tune........................................................................120 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................18, 17 Mean-Tone ...........................................................................73 PSR-A1000 149 Index Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 88 Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory ..................... 74 [MEMORY] button (REGISTRATION MEMORY) ............. 19, 76 [MEMORY] button (SCALE MEMORY)............................ 18, 74 Message Switch .................................................................. 130 Messages ................................................................................ 8 Metronome ........................................................................ 132 [METRONOME] button ........................................................ 18 MIDI .................................................................................. 129 MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals ........................................... 19, 137 MIDI channels.................................................................... 141 MIDI IN.............................................................................. 137 MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 137 MIDI Receive Parts ............................................................. 131 MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 135 MIDI terminals ........................................................... 137, 138 Mix ...................................................................................... 94 [MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 112 [MONO] button ............................................................. 19, 55 MONO POLY (Sound Creator) ............................................. 80 Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 39 MULTI FINGER .................................................................... 59 MULTI PAD [1] - [4] buttons .......................................... 19, 64 Multi Pads ............................................................................ 15 Multi Recording ................................................................... 85 Music Stand ......................................................................... 17 Muting Specific Parts ............................................................ 70 N NAME ............................................................................ 38, 41 Naming Files and Folders ..................................................... 38 NEW (Folder) ....................................................................... 41 [NEXT] button .......................................................... 19, 37, 43 Normal................................................................................. 92 Note Events .......................................................................... 96 Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)................. 138 Note Limit .......................................................................... 108 Nrm...................................................................................... 88 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ........................................... 107 NTT (Note Transposition Table).......................................... 108 O OCTAVE ............................................................................ 114 OCTAVE LEFT (Sound Creator) ............................................. 80 OCTAVE M/LYR (Sound Creator) .......................................... 80 Open/Save displays .............................................................. 35 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder .......................... 41 Oriental Scales ..................................................................... 72 Original Beat ...................................................................... 104 Other Parameters in the Basic Display................................ 102 Other Playback-related Operations....................................... 69 Other Settings..................................................................... 132 OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ......................................... 19, 136 Overdub recording ............................................................... 99 Owner................................................................................ 135 P Pad....................................................................................... 85 PANEL SUSTAIN (Sound Creator) ......................................... 82 Parameter ........................................................................... 107 Parameter Lock................................................................... 133 PASTE ............................................................................ 39, 40 Pedal .................................................................................. 123 PEDAL 1/2 POLARITY ........................................................ 123 PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT ...................................................... 92 Pedal-controllable Functions .............................................. 124 150 PSR-A1000 [PHONES] jack .............................................................18, 136 Phrase...................................................................................85 Phrase Mark..................................................................69, 121 PHRASE MARK REPEAT......................................................121 PITCH BEND ..................................................................18, 55 PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................114 Pitch settings for each scale ..................................................73 Playback of Songs .................................................................21 Playing a style.................................................................28, 56 Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only................................58 Playing Along with the PSR-A1000 .......................................32 Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................................69 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands.........27 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections ...................................................63 Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously.................................53 Playing Styles........................................................................28 Playing the Demos..........................................................20, 49 Playing the Internal Songs .....................................................67 Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder ........................................................136 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously......................................26 Playing Voices ......................................................................25 Playing with the Songs ..........................................................32 PORTAMENT TIME (Sound Creator) .....................................80 PORTAMENTO TIME (Mixing Console) ..............................114 Power Supply........................................................................16 Powering Up.........................................................................17 Power-on Procedure .............................................................16 PRESET drive.........................................................................36 Preset MIDI Templates ........................................................129 Punch In/Out ........................................................................92 Pure Major............................................................................73 Pure Minor............................................................................73 Pythagorean..........................................................................73 Q Quantize.......................................................................93, 106 Quantize Size .......................................................................93 Quick Recording...................................................................84 QUICK START ....................................................................121 Quick Start..........................................................................121 R Rast.......................................................................................73 Realtime Recording.............................................................101 Realtime Recording Characteristics .......................................99 [REC] button ...................................................................18, 83 REC END ..............................................................................92 Rec Mode .............................................................................92 REC START ...........................................................................92 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup .................................78 Recalling the Registered Settings ...........................................78 Recalling the Scale Setting ....................................................75 Receive...............................................................................131 Receive Transpose ..............................................................130 Receiving MIDI Data ..........................................................131 Recording .............................................................................33 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment ......90 Recording Individual Notes...................................................87 Recording Melodies ..............................................................89 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs ................83 Registering Panel Setups .......................................................76 REGISTRATION EDIT display ...............................................77 Registration Memory.............................................................76 Index S S.STOP WINDOW ............................................................. 122 SAVE .................................................................................... 41 Save ............................................................................... 35, 41 Saving Files .......................................................................... 41 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.............................. 77 Saving Your Scale Settings .................................................... 74 Scale .................................................................................... 73 Scale Memory ...................................................................... 74 [SCALE MEMORY] button .................................................... 75 SCALE MEMORY button....................................................... 74 Scale Setting ......................................................................... 72 [SCALE SETTING] buttons .................................................... 72 SCALE TUNE BANK display ................................................. 75 SCALE TUNE display ............................................................ 72 SCALE TUNE EDIT display ................................................... 75 Scale Tuning ........................................................................ 72 [SCALE TUNING] button...................................................... 72 Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons ........... 61 SECTION SET ..................................................................... 122 sections ................................................................................ 30 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out ............................................................... 92 Selecting a Voice.................................................................. 51 Selecting Files and Folders ................................................... 37 Selecting Intro and Ending Types .......................................... 63 Selecting items ..................................................................... 43 Selecting the Freeze Settings................................................. 78 SEQUENCE END ................................................................ 126 Sequence Format................................................................ 143 sequencer........................................................................... 140 Set Up .................................................................................. 95 Setting an Oriental Scale ...................................................... 34 Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting ............................. 72 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters ............... 122 Setting Chord Channels ...................................................... 131 Setting Harmony and Echo ................................................. 127 Setting Root Note Channels ................................................ 131 Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard ................................................................ 54 Setting Song-related Parameters.......................................... 121 Setting the Fingering Method .............................................. 123 Setting the Level Balance and Voice ................................... 113 Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................................... 129 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ... 126 Setting the volume................................................................ 17 SFX....................................................................................... 52 Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style .. 68 SINGLE FINGER....................................................................59 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ....................................................143 Song ...............................................................................14, 66 SONG [START / STOP] button ........................................18, 67 SONG AUTO REVOICE......................................................113 SONG CHAIN PLAY...........................................................121 Song Creator .........................................................................83 Song Playback ..........................................................21, 66, 67 Song Recording.....................................................................83 Song Settings.......................................................................121 SOUND (SOUND CREATOR)...............................................81 Sound Creator Parameters.....................................................80 [SOUND CREATOR] button ...........................................18, 79 Source Root/Chord..............................................................107 SOURCE1 .............................................................................94 SOURCE2 .............................................................................94 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets .............................................................................126 SPEED...................................................................................82 SPEED (HARMONY) .............................................................82 Split Point ...........................................................................122 [STANDBY/ON] switch.............................................14, 18, 17 Step Record ..........................................................................87 Step Record (Chord)..............................................................90 Step Record (Note)................................................................89 Step Recording....................................................................102 STOP ACMP .......................................................................122 [STOP] button (MULTI PAD)...........................................19, 64 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys................62 Strength ..............................................................................105 Style................................................................................14, 56 STYLE [START / STOP] button.........................................18, 57 STYLE buttons .................................................................18, 56 Style Creator .........................................................................99 Style File .......................................................................17, 143 Style File Format .................................................................100 Style Sections........................................................................30 Style Setting ........................................................................122 sustain ............................................................................81, 82 [SUSUTAIN] button ........................................................19, 54 Sweet!...................................................................................52 Swing..................................................................................104 [SYNC.START] button .....................................................18, 57 [SYNC.STOP] button.......................................................18, 62 SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) ....................................................97 System ................................................................................129 System and Insertion ...........................................................117 System Events .......................................................................97 System Messages.................................................................142 System Reset .......................................................................135 SYSTEM SET UP..................................................................135 T Tap Count...........................................................................133 [TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................19, 48 TEMPO [E] [ ] buttons..............................................19, 47 Tempo Indications — MAIN Display ....................................48 [TO HOST] terminal ...............................................15, 19, 138 TO HOST terminal..............................................................138 [TOP] button...................................................................18, 69 TOUCH LIMIT (HARMONY) ................................................82 TOUCH SENSE (Sound Creator)............................................80 [TOUCH] button.............................................................19, 54 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ......................................................18, 70 [TRACK 2 (L)] button.......................................................18, 70 Transmit..............................................................................130 Transmit Clock....................................................................130 E REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons ................... 19, 76 REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS ............................... 76 Registration Sequence ........................................................ 126 RELEASE ............................................................................... 81 Remove Event .................................................................... 106 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range .................................... 70 [REPEAT] button ............................................................. 18, 70 Resonance............................................................................ 81 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000............................................................ 135 Reverb................................................................................ 117 REVERB DEPTH (Sound Creator) .......................................... 82 [REW] button ................................................................. 18, 69 Rhythm ................................................................................ 85 Root ................................................................................... 131 RTR (Retrigger Rule) ........................................................... 108 PSR-A1000 151 Index Transmitting MIDI Data ...................................................... 130 TRANSPOSE [E] [ ] buttons.................................... 19, 125 Transpose Assign ................................................................ 125 Tune................................................................................... 114 TUNING ............................................................................ 114 Tuning the Overall Pitch .................................................... 120 TYPE (HARMONY) ............................................................... 82 E U [UPPER OCTAVE] button ............................................... 19, 55 USER drive ........................................................................... 36 USER EFFECT (Function)..................................................... 135 User Effect (Mixing Console) .............................................. 116 Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/ Scale Memory ................................................................... 72 Using the USB terminal on your computer with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256, etc.)......................... 139 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices ....................... 136 Utility ................................................................................. 132 V [VARIATION] button ...................................................... 19, 55 Velocity........................................................................ 88, 105 Velocity Change ................................................................. 106 VIBRATO ............................................................................. 82 VIBRATO DELAY (Sound Creator) ........................................ 81 VIBRATO DEPTH (Sound Creator)........................................ 81 VIBRATO SPEED (Sound Creator) ......................................... 81 Voice Allocation Format..................................................... 143 VOICE buttons ......................................................... 15, 19, 51 Voice Characteristics ............................................................ 52 Voice Effects......................................................................... 54 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button ......................... 19, 53 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button ............................ 19, 53 VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button .......................... 19, 53 Voice Set ............................................................................ 127 VOLUME (HARMONY) ........................................................ 82 VOLUME (Sound Creator) .................................................... 80 Volume/Voice .................................................................... 113 W Werckmeister ....................................................................... 73 What You Can Do With MIDI ............................................ 142 What’s MIDI? ..................................................................... 139 X XF ................................................................................ 17, 143 XG ............................................................................... 17, 143 152 PSR-A1000 MEMO PSR-A1000 153 OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) 154 PSR-A1000 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. ASIA ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0661 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 MALAYSIA DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND EUROPE HONG KONG F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 THAILAND OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 [PK] 22 (PSR-A1000) PSR-A1000 155 Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2002 Yamaha Corporation Printed in Indonesia ??????? ???AP???.?-01A0